C-ClassCoupeOperator's Manual

Order no. 6515 0828 13 Part no. 204 584 72 00 Edition B 2015

É2045847200.ËÍ2045847200

C-Clas

s Cou

pe

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks

of DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are

registered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of

Johnson Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trade-

marks of Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Har-

man International Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are reg-

istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora-tion.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius

XM Radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-

uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark of

Gracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are reg-

istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in succes-sion indicate an instruction with sev-eral steps.

(Ypage)

This symbol tells you where you canfind more information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on thenext page.

Dis‐play

This text indicates a message in themultifunction/COMAND/Audio dis-play.

As at 15.05.2014

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving. For your own safetyand a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc-tions and warning notices in this manual.Ignoring them could result in damage to thevehicle or personal injury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RmodelRorderRcountry specificationRavailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass alldocuments on to the new owner.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

2045847200 É2045847200.ËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 21

At a glance ........................................... 29

Safety ................................................... 39

Opening and closing ........................... 73

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 95

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 109

Climate control ................................. 123

Driving and parking .......................... 133

On-board computer and displays .... 191

Stowage and features ...................... 247

Maintenance and care ...................... 271

Roadside Assistance ........................ 285

Wheels and tires ............................... 301

Technical data ................................... 341

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...4ETS

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-tion System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 17312 V socket

see Sockets115 V socket ...................................... 256

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 211Function/notes ................................ 64Important safety notes .................... 64Warning lamp ................................. 236

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 127Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 202Display message ............................ 226Function/information .................... 185

Active Driving Assistance package .. 185Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 202Display message ............................ 225Function/information .................... 188

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 70Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 221Function/notes ............................. 114Switching on/off ................... 114, 115

Additives (engine oil) ........................ 346Air bag

Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 47

Air bagsDisplay message ............................ 217Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 44Important safety notes .................... 42Knee bag .......................................... 45PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-tor lamp ........................................... 47

Pelvis air bag ................................... 46Safety guidelines ............................. 41Side impact air bag .......................... 45Window curtain air bag .................... 46

Air ventsGlove box ....................................... 132Important safety notes .................. 131Rear ............................................... 132Setting ........................................... 131Setting the center air vents ........... 132Setting the side air vents ............... 132

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

AlarmATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 72Switching off (ATA) .......................... 72Switching the function on/off(ATA) ................................................ 72

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 206Animals in the vehicle ......................... 63Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Anti-Theft Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Ashtray ............................................... 254Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 201Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 200ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 277Hiding a service message .............. 276Notes ..................................... 276, 277Resetting the service interval dis-play ................................................ 277Service message ............................ 276Special service requirements ......... 277

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 72Function ........................................... 72Switching off the alarm .................... 72

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 202Display message ............................ 225Function/notes ............................. 181

4 Index

Audio menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 198Audio system

see separate operating instructionsAuthorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshopAuthorized workshop

see Qualified specialist workshopAUTO lights

Display message ............................ 220see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 278Automatic engine start (ECO start/stop function) .................................... 140Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 139Automatic headlamp mode .............. 110Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 145Automatic drive program ............... 146Changing gear ............................... 145Display message ............................ 231Driving tips .................................... 145Emergency running mode .............. 150Kickdown ....................................... 145Manual drive program .................... 148Overview ........................................ 143Problem (malfunction) ................... 150Program selector button ................ 145Pulling away ................................... 138Releasing the parking lock man-ually ............................................... 150Selector lever ................................ 143Shift ranges ................................... 147Starting the engine ........................ 137Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 146Transmission position display ........ 144Transmission positions .................. 144

Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 150

BBackup lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 119Display message ............................ 220

Bag hook ............................................ 251BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 64

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) .................................................... 65Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 77Important safety notes .................... 77Replacing ......................................... 77

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 293Display message ............................ 223Important safety notes .................. 291Jump starting ................................. 294

Beltsee Seat belts

Belt force limiterActivation ......................................... 57Function ........................................... 57

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 202Display message ............................ 226Notes/function .............................. 181see Active Blind Spot Assist

Brake Assistsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 213Notes ............................................. 346

Brake lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 119Display message ............................ 219

BrakesABS .................................................. 64BAS .................................................. 64BAS PLUS ........................................ 65Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 346Display message ............................ 211High-performance brake system .... 159Important safety notes .................. 157Maintenance .................................. 158Parking brake ................................ 154Riding tips ...................................... 157Warning lamp ................................. 236

Breakdownsee Flat tiresee Towing away/tow-starting

Brightness control knob (instru-ment cluster lighting, multifunc-tion steering wheel with 12 but-tons) ..................................................... 31

Index 5

Bulbssee Replacing bulbs

CCalifornia

Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 23

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Carsee Vehicle

CareCar wash ........................................ 278Carpets .......................................... 284Display ........................................... 282Exterior lights ................................ 281Gear or selector lever .................... 283Interior ........................................... 282Matte finish ................................... 280Notes ............................................. 277Paint .............................................. 279Plastic trim .................................... 282Power washer ................................ 278Rear view camera .......................... 281Roof lining ...................................... 284Seat belt ........................................ 284Seat cover ..................................... 283Sensors ......................................... 281Steering wheel ............................... 283Tail pipes ....................................... 282Trim pieces .................................... 283Washing by hand ........................... 278Wheels ........................................... 279Windows ........................................ 280Wiper blades .................................. 281Wooden trim .................................. 283

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 251CD player/CD changer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 198Center console

Lower section .................................. 35Upper section .................................. 34

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 205Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 74

Changing bulbsBrake lamps ................................... 119Cornering light function ................. 118High-beam headlamps ................... 118Low-beam headlamps .................... 117Parking lamps ................................ 118Reversing lamps ............................ 119Standing lamps (front) ................... 118

Child seatLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 61Top Tether ....................................... 62

ChildrenRestraint systems ............................ 58Special seat belt retractor ............... 61

Cigarette lighter ................................ 255Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 281Climate control

Controlling automatically ............... 128Cooling with air dehumidification .. 127Defrosting the windows ................. 130Defrosting the windshield .............. 129Dual-zone automatic climate con-trol ................................................. 125Important safety notes .................. 124Indicator lamp ................................ 128Information about using dual-zoneautomatic climate control .............. 126Maximum cooling .......................... 130Overview of systems ...................... 124Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 131Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 128Refrigerant ..................................... 348Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 348Setting the air distribution ............. 128Setting the air vents ...................... 131Setting the airflow ......................... 129Setting the temperature ................ 128Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 131Switching on/off ........................... 127Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 130Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 129

6 Index

CockpitOverview .......................................... 30see Instrument cluster

COMANDsee separate operating instructions

Combination switch .......................... 112Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 195Convenience closing feature .............. 88Convenience opening feature ............ 87Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 275Display message ............................ 221Filling capacity ............................... 347Important safety notes .................. 346Temperature (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 206Temperature gauge ........................ 192Warning lamp ................................. 243

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 28Cornering light function

Changing bulbs .............................. 118Display message ............................ 218Function/notes ............................. 113

Crash-responsive emergency light-ing ....................................................... 116Cruise control

Cruise control lever ....................... 161Deactivating ................................... 162Display message ............................ 229Driving system ............................... 160Function/notes ............................. 160Important safety notes .................. 160Setting a speed .............................. 161Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 161

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 253Important safety notes .................. 253Rear compartment ......................... 253

Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 26Customer Relations Department ....... 26

DDashboard

see Instrument clusterData

see Technical dataDaytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 220Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 203Switching on/off (switch) .............. 110

Declarations of conformity ................. 25Delayed switch-off

Exterior lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 204Interior lighting .............................. 204

Diagnostics connection ...................... 25Digital speedometer ......................... 196Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 282Display messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 276Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 210Driving systems ............................. 225Engine ............................................ 221General notes ................................ 210Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 210KEYLESS-GO .................................. 233Lights ............................................. 218Safety systems .............................. 211SmartKey ....................................... 232Tires ............................................... 229Vehicle ........................................... 231

Distance recorder ............................. 195see Odometersee Trip odometer

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 245DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditions ..................... 164Deactivating ................................... 168Display message ............................ 227Displays in the multifunction dis-play ................................................ 167Driving tips .................................... 168Function/notes ............................. 162Important safety notes .................. 162Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 166Warning lamp ................................. 245

Index 7

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 205Automatic locking (switch) ............... 82Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 74Control panel ................................... 37Display message ............................ 231Emergency locking ........................... 82Emergency unlocking ....................... 82Important safety notes .................... 80Opening (from inside) ...................... 81

Drinking and driving ......................... 155Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 146Display ........................................... 144Manual ........................................... 148SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 207

Drive program selector ..................... 146Driver's door

see DoorsDriving abroad

Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 277Driving lamps

see Daytime running lampsDriving on flooded roads .................. 159Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 64ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 70BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 64BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) ............................................... 65EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 69ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 66ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ........................................... 66Important safety information ........... 63Overview .......................................... 63PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 70

Driving systemsActive Blind Spot Assist ................. 185Active Driving Assistance pack-age ................................................. 185Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 188ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 181

Blind Spot Assist ............................ 181Cruise control ................................ 160Display message ............................ 225DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 162Dynamic handling package withsports mode .................................. 170HOLD function ............................... 171Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 183Lane Tracking package .................. 181Parking Guidance ........................... 177PARKTRONIC ................................. 173RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 172Rear view camera .......................... 180

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 145Brakes ........................................... 157Break-in period .............................. 134DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 168Downhill gradient ........................... 157Drinking and driving ....................... 155Driving in winter ............................. 160Driving on flooded roads ................ 159Driving on wet roads ...................... 159Exhaust check ............................... 156Fuel ................................................ 155General .......................................... 155Hydroplaning ................................. 159Icy road surfaces ........................... 160Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 158Snow chains .................................. 305Wet road surface ........................... 158

DVD video (on-board computer) ...... 199Dynamic handling package withsports mode ....................................... 170

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 205Function/notes ............................. 103

EASY-EXIT featureCrash-responsive ........................... 104Function/notes ............................. 103Switching on/off ........................... 205

EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 212

8 Index

Function/notes ................................ 69ECO display

Function/notes ............................. 156On-board computer ....................... 196

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 140Automatic engine switch-off .......... 139Deactivating/activating ................. 141General information ....................... 139Important safety notes .................. 139Introduction ................................... 138

Electronic brake force distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 82Trunk ......................................... 85, 86Vehicle ............................................. 82

Emergency spare wheelGeneral notes ................................ 339Important safety notes .................. 338Storage location ............................ 339Technical data ............................... 340

Emergency Tensioning DevicesFunction ........................................... 57Safety guidelines ............................. 41

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 22

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 242Display message ............................ 221ECO start/stop function ................ 138Engine number ............................... 343Irregular running ............................ 142Jump-starting ................................. 294Starting problems .......................... 142Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 137Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 137Switching off .................................. 154Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 298

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 142

Engine jump startingsee Jump starting (engine)

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 274Additives ........................................ 346Checking the oil level ..................... 273Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 273Display message ............................ 223Filling capacity ............................... 346Notes about oil grades ................... 345Notes on oil level/consumption .... 273Temperature (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 206Viscosity ........................................ 346

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

Activating/deactivating (exceptAMG vehicles) .................................. 67AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 207Deactivating/activating (AMGvehicles) .......................................... 68Deactivating/activating (exceptAMG vehicles) ................................ 201Display message ............................ 211ETS/4ETS ........................................ 66Function/notes ................................ 66General notes .................................. 66Important safety information ........... 66Warning lamp ................................. 238

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 66Exhaust check ................................... 156Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 282Exterior lighting

Setting options .............................. 110see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 104Dipping (automatic) ....................... 106Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 206Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 105Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 105Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 106Setting ........................................... 105Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 107

Index 9

Storing the parking position .......... 106

FFiller cap

see Fuel filler flapFlat tire

MOExtended tires .......................... 287Preparing the vehicle ..................... 286TIREFIT kit ...................................... 288see Emergency spare wheel

Floormats ........................................... 269Fog lamps

Switching on/off ........................... 111Front fog lamps

Switching on/off ........................... 111Fuel

Additives ........................................ 345Consumption statistics .................. 195Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 196Displaying the range ...................... 196Driving tips .................................... 155Fuel gauge ....................................... 31Grade (gasoline) ............................ 344Important safety notes .................. 343Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 345Premium-grade unleaded gaso-line ................................................. 344Problem (malfunction) ................... 153Refueling ........................................ 150Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 344

Fuel filler flapOpening ......................................... 151

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 196

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 344Problem (malfunction) ................... 153

Fuse allocation chart (vehicle toolkit) ...................................................... 286Fuses

Allocation chart ............................. 299Before changing ............................. 299Fuse box in the engine compart-ment .............................................. 299Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 299

Important safety notes .................. 298

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 269General notes ................................ 266Important safety notes .................. 266Opening/closing the garage door .. 268Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 266Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 267

Gear indicator (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 206Gear or selector lever (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 283Genuine parts ...................................... 21Glove box ........................................... 249

HHazard warning lamps ...................... 113Head restraints

Adjusting ......................................... 98Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 99see NECK-PRO head restraints

HeadlampsAdding fluid to cleaning system ..... 275Cleaning system (function) ............ 113Cleaning system (notes) ................ 347Fogging up ..................................... 115see Automatic headlamp mode

Heatingsee Climate control

High-beam headlampsChanging bulbs .............................. 118Display message ............................ 219Switching on/off ........................... 112

Hill start assist .................................. 138HOLD function

Deactivating ................................... 171Display message ............................ 225Function/notes ............................. 171

HoodClosing ........................................... 273Display message ............................ 231Important safety notes .................. 272Opening ......................................... 272

10 Index

Horn ...................................................... 30Hydroplaning ..................................... 159

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 71Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lampsIndicators

see Turn signalsInstrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 31Settings ......................................... 203Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 192Interior lighting ................................. 115

Automatic control .......................... 116Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 204Emergency lighting ........................ 116Manual control ............................... 116Overview ........................................ 115Reading lamp ................................. 115

JJack

Storage location ............................ 286Using ............................................. 326

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 294

KKey positions

KEYLESS-GO .................................. 136SmartKey ....................................... 135

KEYLESS-GOConvenience closing feature ............ 88Display message ............................ 233Locking ............................................ 75Start/Stop button .......................... 136Starting the engine ........................ 137Unlocking ......................................... 75

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 145Manual drive program .................... 149

Knee bag .............................................. 45

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane detection (automatic)

see Lane Keeping AssistLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 202Display message ............................ 225Function/information .................... 183

Lane Tracking package ..................... 181Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 207LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 61Light function, active

Display message ............................ 220Light sensor (display message) ....... 220Lights

Activating/deactivating the inte-rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 204Automatic headlamp mode ............ 110Cornering light function ................. 113Display message ............................ 218Fog lamps ...................................... 111Hazard warning lamps ................... 113High beam flasher .......................... 113High-beam headlamps ................... 112Light switch ................................... 110Low-beam headlamps .................... 111Parking lamps ................................ 112Rear fog lamp ................................ 112Standing lamps .............................. 112Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 203Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (switch) .................... 110Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 204Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 204Turn signals ................................... 112see Interior lightingsee Replacing bulbs

Loading guidelines ............................ 248Locking

see Central locking

Index 11

Locking (doors)Automatic ........................................ 82Emergency locking ........................... 82From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 81

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 205Low-beam headlamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 117Display message ............................ 218Switching on/off ........................... 111

Lumbar supportAdjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 100

MM+S tires ............................................ 305Malfunction message

see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 280mbrace

Call priority .................................... 262Display message ............................ 213Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 262Downloading routes ....................... 265Emergency call .............................. 259General notes ................................ 258Geo fencing ................................... 265Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 264MB info call button ........................ 261Remote fault diagnosis .................. 264Remote vehicle locking .................. 263Roadside Assistance button .......... 260Search & Send ............................... 263Self-test ......................................... 259Speed alert .................................... 265System .......................................... 259Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 266Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 263

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 76Locking vehicle ................................ 82Unlocking the driver's door .............. 82

Media Interfacesee Separate operating instructions

Memory card (audio) ......................... 198Memory function ............................... 107Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 210Messages

see Display messagesMirrors

see Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneMenu (on-board computer) ............ 199

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 76MOExtended tires .............................. 287Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 329Mounting a new wheel ................... 328Preparing the vehicle ..................... 325Raising the vehicle ......................... 326Removing a wheel .......................... 328Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 326

MP3Operation ....................................... 198see separate operating instructions

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 194Permanent display ......................... 203

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer .. 193Overview .......................................... 33

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 197see separate operating instructions

NECK-PRO head restraintsOperation ......................................... 52Resetting triggered .......................... 53

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 134

12 Index

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Faults ............................................... 51Operation ......................................... 47System self-test ............................... 50

Occupant safetyAir bags ........................................... 42Children in the vehicle ..................... 58Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 47Pets in the vehicle ........................... 63PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 52SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) ................................................. 41System overview .............................. 40

OCSFaults ............................................... 51Operation ......................................... 47System self-test ............................... 50

Odometer ........................................... 195Oil

see Engine oilOn-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 206Assistance menu ........................... 200Audio menu ................................... 198Convenience submenu .................. 205Display messages .......................... 210Displaying a service message ........ 277DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 167Factory settings submenu ............. 206Important safety notes .................. 192Instrument cluster submenu .......... 203Lighting submenu .......................... 203Menu overview .............................. 195Message memory .......................... 210Navigation menu ............................ 197Operation ....................................... 193RACETIMER ................................... 207Service menu ................................. 202Settings menu ............................... 203Standard display ............................ 195Telephone menu ............................ 199Trip menu ...................................... 195Vehicle submenu ........................... 205

Video DVD operation ..................... 199Opening and closing the side trimpanels ................................................. 119Operating safety

Declaration of conformity ................ 25Important safety notes .................... 24

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Operator's ManualVehicle equipment ........................... 22

Outside temperature display ........... 193Overhead control panel ...................... 36

PPaint code number ............................ 342Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 279Panic alarm .......................................... 40Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Important safety notes .................... 90Opening/closing .............................. 91Opening/closing the roller sun-blind ................................................. 92Problem (malfunction) ..................... 92Resetting ......................................... 92

Parking ............................................... 153Important safety notes .................. 153Parking brake ................................ 154Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 106Rear view camera .......................... 180see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidParking Guidance ........................... 177see Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking assistancesee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 212Notes/function .............................. 154

Parking GuidanceDisplay message ............................ 226Important safety notes .................. 177

Parking lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 118Switching on/off ........................... 112

Index 13

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 175Driving system ............................... 173Function/notes ............................. 173Important safety notes .................. 173Problem (malfunction) ................... 177Range of the sensors ..................... 174Warning display ............................. 175

PASSENGER AIR BAGDisplay message ............................ 217

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFProblem (malfunction) ..................... 51

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp ...................................................... 47PASSENGER AIRBAG

Problems (malfunction) .................. 217Pets in the vehicle ............................... 63Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 282Power washers .................................. 278Power windows

see Side windowsPRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Display message ............................ 213Operation ......................................... 52

PRE-SAFE® BrakeActivating/deactivating ................. 201Display message ............................ 214Function/notes ................................ 70Warning lamp ................................. 245

Program selector button .................. 145Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 72Immobilizer ...................................... 71

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 21

Pulling awayAutomatic transmission ................. 138

QQR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1Rescue card ..................................... 27

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 25

RRACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 172RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 207Radar sensor system

Activating/deactivating ................. 205Display message ............................ 225

RadioSelecting a station ......................... 198see separate operating instructions

Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 25Reading lamp ..................................... 115Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 132Rear fog lamp

Display message ............................ 219Switching on/off ........................... 112

Rear seat (folding the backrest for-wards/back) ...................................... 250Rear view camera

Cleaning instructions ..................... 281Function/notes ............................. 180

Rear window defrosterProblem (malfunction) ................... 131Switching on/off ........................... 130

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 104Dipping (automatic) ....................... 106

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)

Important safety notes .................. 348Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 31Important safety notes .................. 150Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 345Refueling process .......................... 151see Fuel

Releasing the parking lock man-ually (automatic transmission) ........ 150Remote control

Garage door opener ....................... 266Programming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 266

Replacing bulbsImportant safety notes .................. 116Overview of bulb types .................. 117

14 Index

Reporting safety defects .................... 26Rescue card ......................................... 27Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 224Warning lamp ................................. 242see Fuel

Reverse gearEngaging (automatic transmis-sion) ............................................... 143

Reversing featurePanorama sliding sunroof ................ 90Roller sunblind ................................. 91Side windows ................................... 87Trunk lid ........................................... 83

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 23Roller blind

see Roller sunblindRoller sunblind

Opening/closing .............................. 92Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ..................................... 91

Roof carrier ........................................ 252Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 284Roof load (maximum) ........................ 349Route (navigation)

see Route guidance (navigation)Route guidance (navigation) ............ 197

SSafety

Child restraint systems .................... 58Children in the vehicle ..................... 58Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 47Overview of occupant safety sys-tems ................................................ 40

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 56Belt force limiters ............................ 57Cleaning ......................................... 284Correct usage .................................. 54

Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 57Fastening ......................................... 55Important safety guidelines ............. 53Releasing ......................................... 56Safety guidelines ............................. 41Switching belt adjustment on/off(on-board computer) ...................... 206Warning lamp ................................. 234Warning lamp (function) ................... 57

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 98Adjusting (manually and electri-cally) ................................................ 98Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 100Adjusting the head restraint ............ 98Cleaning the cover ......................... 283Correct driver's seat position ........... 96Folding the backrests forward/back ................................................. 99Important safety notes .................... 97Seat backrest display message ..... 232Seat heating problem .................... 101Seat ventilation problem ................ 102Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 107Switching seat heating on/off ....... 100Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 101

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 281Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 202Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 346Coolant (engine) ............................ 346Engine oil ....................................... 345Fuel ................................................ 343Important safety notes .................. 343Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 348Washer fluid ................................... 347

Setting the air distribution ............... 128Setting the airflow ............................ 129Settings

Factory (on-board computer) ......... 206On-board computer ....................... 203

SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 207Side impact air bag ............................. 45

Index 15

Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 220Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 280Convenience closing feature ............ 88Convenience opening feature .......... 87Important safety information ........... 86Opening/closing .............................. 87Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89Resetting ......................................... 89

Sliding sunroofsee Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 77Changing the programming ............. 76Checking the battery ....................... 77Convenience closing feature ............ 88Convenience opening feature .......... 87Display message ............................ 232Door central locking/unlocking ....... 74Important safety notes .................... 74Loss ................................................. 79Mechanical key ................................ 76Positions (ignition lock) ................. 135Problem (malfunction) ..................... 79Starting the engine ........................ 137

Snow chains ...................................... 305Sockets

General notes ................................ 255Rear compartment ......................... 256

Special seat belt retractor .................. 61Specialist workshop ............................ 25Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Digital ............................................ 196In the Instrument cluster ................. 31Segments ...................................... 193Selecting the unit of measure-ment .............................................. 203see Instrument cluster

SPORT handling modeActivating/deactivating (AMGvehicles) .......................................... 68Warning lamp ................................. 239

SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem)

Display message ............................ 214Introduction ..................................... 41Warning lamp ................................. 241Warning lamp (function) ................... 41

Standing lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 118Display message ............................ 219Switching on/off ........................... 112

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 137Steering (display message) .............. 232Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 103Adjusting (manually) ...................... 102Button overview ............................... 33Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 193Cleaning ......................................... 283Important safety notes .................. 102Paddle shifters ............................... 146Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 107

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 146Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 207Stowage areas ................................... 249Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 249Cup holders ................................... 253Glove box ....................................... 249Important safety information ......... 249Stowage net ................................... 250

Stowage net ....................................... 250Stowage well beneath the trunkfloor .................................................... 252Summer tires ..................................... 304Sun visor ............................................ 254Surround lighting (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 204Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 131

TTachometer ........................................ 193Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 219

16 Index

Tanksee Fuel tank

Tank contentFuel gauge ....................................... 31

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 343Emergency spare wheel ................. 340Information .................................... 342Tires/wheels ................................. 329Vehicle data ................................... 349

TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 262Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 262Downloading routes ....................... 265Emergency call .............................. 259General notes ................................ 258Geo fencing ................................... 265Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 264MB info call button ........................ 261Remote vehicle locking .................. 263Roadside Assistance button .......... 260Search & Send ............................... 263Self-test ......................................... 259Speed alert .................................... 265System .......................................... 259Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 266Vehicle Health Check .................... 264Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 263

TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 199Display message ............................ 232Menu (on-board computer) ............ 199Number from the phone book ........ 200Redialing ........................................ 200Rejecting/ending a call ................. 200

TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 192Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 206Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 206Outside temperature ...................... 193Setting (climate control) ................ 128

Through-loading feature ................... 250Time

see separate operating instructionsTiming (RACETIMER) ......................... 207Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 309

Checking manually ........................ 309Display message ............................ 229Important safety notes .................. 310Maximum ....................................... 309Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 289Notes ............................................. 307Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 290Recommended ............................... 306

Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 311Function/notes ............................. 309General notes ................................ 309Important safety notes .................. 310Radio type approval for the tirepressure monitor ........................... 312Restarting ...................................... 312Warning lamp ................................. 246Warning message .......................... 311

TIREFIT kit .......................................... 288Tires

Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 324Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 322Bar (definition) ............................... 322Changing a wheel .......................... 325Characteristics .............................. 322Checking ........................................ 303Curb weight (definition) ................. 323Definition of terms ......................... 322Direction of rotation ...................... 325Display message ............................ 229Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 324DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 322DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 321GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 323General notes ................................ 329GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 323GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 323Important safety notes .................. 302Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 322

Index 17

Information on driving .................... 302Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 323Labeling (overview) ........................ 318Load bearing index (definition) ...... 324Load index ..................................... 321Load index (definition) ................... 323M+S tires ....................................... 305Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 323Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 323Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 323Maximum tire load ......................... 316Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 323MOExtended tires .......................... 304Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 324PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 323Replacing ....................................... 325Service life ..................................... 304Sidewall (definition) ....................... 324Speed rating (definition) ................ 323Storing ........................................... 325Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 322Summer tires ................................. 304Temperature .................................. 318TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 324Tire bead (definition) ...................... 324Tire pressure (definition) ................ 324Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 322Tire size (data) ............................... 329Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 319Tire tread ....................................... 303Tire tread (definition) ..................... 324Total load limit (definition) ............. 324Traction ......................................... 317Traction (definition) ....................... 324Tread wear ..................................... 317Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 317Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 322Wear indicator (definition) ............. 324

Wheel and tire combination ........... 331Wheel rim (definition) .................... 322see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 62Tow-starting

Emergency engine starting ............ 298Important safety notes .................. 296

Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 296Installing the towing eye ................ 297Removing the towing eye ............... 297With both axles on the ground ....... 297With the rear axle raised ................ 297

Transmissionsee Automatic transmission

Transporting the vehicle .................. 298Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 283Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 195Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 195Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 196

TrunkEmergency release .................... 85, 86Important safety notes .................... 83Locking separately ........................... 85Opening (automatically frominside) .............................................. 85Opening (automatically from out-side) ................................................. 84

Trunk lidDisplay message ............................ 231Opening dimensions ...................... 349Opening/closing .............................. 83

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 349Turn signals

Display message ............................ 218Switching on/off ........................... 112

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 82From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 81

18 Index

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 254Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 26Data acquisition ............................... 27Display message ............................ 231Emergency locking ........................... 82Emergency unlocking ....................... 82Equipment ....................................... 22Individual settings .......................... 203Limited Warranty ............................. 26Loading .......................................... 313Locking (in an emergency) ............... 82Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 74Lowering ........................................ 329Maintenance .................................... 23Parking for a long period ................ 155Pulling away ................................... 138Raising ........................................... 326Reporting problems ......................... 26Securing from rolling away ............ 326Towing away .................................. 296Transporting .................................. 298Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 82Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 74Vehicle data ................................... 349

Vehicle data ....................................... 349Vehicle dimensions ........................... 349Vehicle emergency locking ................ 82Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 342Vehicle maintenance

see ASSYST PLUSVehicle tool kit .................................. 286Video (DVD) ........................................ 199VIN ...................................................... 342

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 236Brakes ........................................... 236Check Engine ................................. 242Coolant .......................................... 243Distance warning ........................... 245DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 245

ESP® .............................................. 238ESP® OFF ....................................... 239Fuel tank ........................................ 242Overview .......................................... 32PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 47Reserve fuel ................................... 242Seat belt ........................................ 234SPORT handling mode ................... 239SRS ................................................ 241Tire pressure monitor .................... 246

Warranty .............................................. 22Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 232Wheel and tire combination

see TiresWheel bolt tightening torque ........... 329Wheel chock ...................................... 326Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 325Checking ........................................ 303Cleaning ......................................... 279Emergency spare wheel ................. 338General notes ................................ 329Important safety notes .................. 302Information on driving .................... 302Interchanging/changing ................ 325Mounting a new wheel ................... 328Mounting a wheel .......................... 325Removing a wheel .......................... 328Storing ........................................... 325Tightening torque ........................... 329Wheel size/tire size ....................... 329

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 215Operation ......................................... 46

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 129

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer system .............. 275Notes ............................................. 347

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 122Replacing the wiper blades ............ 121Switching on/off ........................... 120

Index 19

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 304Slippery road surfaces ................... 160Snow chains .................................. 305

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 305

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 281Important safety notes .................. 121Replacing ....................................... 121

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 283Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

ZZONE function

Switching on/off ........................... 129

20 Index

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-

sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressures

are correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer need

them.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute

to environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop.Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when

starting the engine.Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle

is stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and

braking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-

tion.

Environmental concerns and recom-mendations

Wherever the operating instructions requireyou to dispose of materials, first try to regen-erate or re-use them. Observe the relevantenvironmental rules and regulations whendisposing of materials. In this way you willhelp to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditioned majorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraint sys-tems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

Introduction 21

Z

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheelsas well as accessories relevant to safetywhich have not been approved by Mercedes.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Useonly genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts ofequal quality. Only use tires, wheels andaccessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts shouldtherefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-tain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz partsfor necessary service and repair work. In addi-tion, strategically located parts delivery cen-ters provide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification num-ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 342).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences are possi-ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may notfeature all functions described here. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The Operator's Manual and MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Service and literatureThe implied warranty for your vehicle appliesin accordance with the warranty terms andconditions in the Service and Warranty Infor-mation booklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordance with the following warranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-

setts, New York, Pennsylvania, RhodeIsland and Vermont Emission Control Sys-tem WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemon

laws)Replacement parts and accessories are cov-ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-sories warranties. These are available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and War-ranty Information booklet, have an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for areplacement. The new Service and War-ranty Information booklet will be posted toyou.

22 Introduction

Information for customers in Califor-nia

Under California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after a rea-sonable number of repair attemptsMercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its author-ized repair or service facilities fail to fix one ormore substantial defects or malfunctions inthe vehicle that are covered by its expresswarranty. During the period of 18 monthsfrom original delivery of the vehicle or theaccumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle,whichever occurs first, a reasonable numberof repair attempts is presumed for a retailbuyer or lessee if one or more of the followingoccurs:(1) the same substantial defect or malfunc-

tion results in a condition that is likely tocause death or serious bodily injury if thevehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc-tion has been subject to repair two ormore times, and you have directly noti-fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writingof the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunc-tion of a less serious nature than cate-gory (1) has been subject to repair four ormore times and you have directly notifiedus in writing of the need for its repair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and Warranty Book-let with you when you bring the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser-vice advisor will record every service for youin the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram offers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis-tance" section in the Service and Warrantybooklet (Canada). You will find both in yourvehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change of own-ership

In the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim-ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con-tacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in

Introduction 23

Z

the Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand Canada

If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts may

not be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic

converter may not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalytic con-verter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower

octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairs

carried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigs may ignite if they come into contact withhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-tronics, the general operating permit is ren-dered invalid.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high

curb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a

curb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriage

or parts of the chassis

24 Introduction

In situations like this, the body, the under-carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tirescould be damaged without the damagebeing visible. Components damaged in thisway can unexpectedly fail or, in the case ofan accident, no longer withstand the strainthey are designed to.If the underbody paneling is damaged,combustible materials such as leaves,grass or twigs can gather between theunderbody and the underbody paneling. Ifthese materials come in contact with hotparts of the exhaust system, they can catchfire.In such situations, have the vehiclechecked and repaired immediately at aqualified specialist workshop. If on con-tinuing your journey you notice that drivingsafety is impaired, pull over and stop thevehicle immediately, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. In such cases,consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper-ation is subject to the following two condi-tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm-ful interference, and 2) These devices mustaccept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired oper-ation. Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevices must accept any interference, includ-ing interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device."

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. As a result,the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-tics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equip-ment on the diagnostics connection isused, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can lead to emissions monitoringinformation being reset, for example. Thismay lead to the vehicle failing to meet therequirements of the next emissions test dur-ing the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has the nec-essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali-fications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.

Introduction 25

Z

Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book-let.Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-

tionsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when driv-ing your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe vehicle technical dataRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining to

motor vehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problemagain with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con-tact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Actof 1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition to notify-ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manual

about the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

26 Introduction

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flapand on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In theevent of an accident, rescue services can usethe QR code to quickly find the appropriaterescue card for your vehicle. The current res-cue card contains the most important infor-mation about your vehicle in a compact form,e.g. the routing of the electric cables.You can find more information under https://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/content/asportal/en/communication/informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data recordingThis vehicle is capable of recording diagnosticinformation relating to vehicle operation, mal-functions, and user settings. This may includeinformation about the performance or statusof various systems, including but not limitedto, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys-tems, that is stored and can be read out withsuitable devices, particularly when the vehi-cle is serviced. The data obtained is used toproperly diagnose and service your vehicle orto further optimize and develop vehicle func-tions.

COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID)If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle’soperation, the use of the vehicle in certainsituations, and the location of the vehicle maybe compiled through COMAND or the mbracesystem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual and/or the mbraceTerms and Conditions.

Event data recordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDRis to record data that will assist in under-standing how a vehicle’s systems performedin certain crash or near crash-like situations,such as during air bag deployment or whenhitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designedto record data related to vehicle dynamicsand safety systems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:Rhow various systems in your vehicle are

operatingRwhether or not the driver and passenger

seat belts are fastenedRhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the

accelerator and/or brake pedal andRhow fast the vehicle is travelingThis data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data isrecorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data is recorded bythe EDR under normal driving conditions andno personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) are recorded. However,other parties, such as law enforcement, cancombine the EDR data with the type of per-sonal identification data routinely acquiredduring a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the vehi-cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties that havethe special equipment, such as law enforce-ment, can read the information by accessingthe vehicle or the EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminalmatters as a tool in accident reconstruction,accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since theCrash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used toextract data from the EDR is commerciallyavailable, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Introduction 27

Z

("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia-bility arising from the extraction of this infor-mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per-sonnel.MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or,if the vehicle is leased, without the consent ofthe lessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by lawenforcement; by federal, state or local gov-ernment; in connection with or arising out oflitigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiariesand affiliates; or, as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of theRestraint System Module. Tampering with,altering, modifying or removing the EDR com-ponent may result in a malfunction of theRestraint System Module and other systems.State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-emp-ted. This means that in the event of such con-flict, the federal regulation governs. As ofFebruary 2013, 13 states have enacted lawsrelating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and itselectronic components is available on the fol-lowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

28 Introduction

Cockpit ................................................. 30Instrument cluster .............................. 31Multifunction steering wheel ............. 33Center console .................................... 34Overhead control panel ...................... 36Door control panel .............................. 37

29

At a

gla

nce

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddleshifters 146

; Combination switch 112

= Instrument cluster 31

? Horn

A PARKTRONIC warning dis-play 173

B Overhead control panel 36

C Climate control systems 124

D Ignition lock 135Start/Stop button 136

Function Page

E Adjusts the steering wheelmanually 102

F Adjusts the steering wheelelectrically 102

G Cruise control lever 161

H Parking brake 154

I Diagnostics connection 25

J Opens the hood 272

K Releases the parking brake 154

L Light switch 110

30 CockpitAt

a g

lanc

e

Instrument cluster

Displays and controls

Function Page

: Fuel gageFuel filler flap location indi-cator 8: the fuel fillercap is on the right-handside.

; Coolant temperature 192

= SpeedometerSpeedometer segments 193

Function Page

? Multifunction display 194Outside temperature dis-play 193

A Tachometer 193

B Instrument cluster lighting 192

Instrument cluster 31

At a

gla

nce

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page

: ÷ ESP® 238M SPORT handlingmode in AMG vehicles 239

; · Distance warning 245

= å ESP® OFF 238

? $ Brakes (USA only) 236

A J Brakes (Canada only) 236

B #! Turn signals 112

C ! ABS 236

D 6 SRS 241

E ; Check Engine 242

F h Tire pressure monitor 246

Function Page

G ü Seat belt 234

H ÷ ESP® in AMG vehicles 239

I ? Coolant 243

J K High-beam head-lamps 112

K L Low-beam head-lamps 111

L T Parking lamps 112

M R Rear fog lamp 112

N N Front fog lamps 111

O 8 Reserve fuel 242

32 Instrument clusterAt

a g

lanc

e

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 194

; Audio system/COMANDdisplay (see the separateoperating instructions)

= ?

Switches on the Voice Con-trol System (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)

? ~

Rejects or ends a call 199Exits phone book/redialmemory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redial mem-oryW XAdjusts the volume8

Mute

Function Page

A = ;Selects a menu 1939 :Selects a submenu orscrolls through lists 193a

Confirms selection 193Hides display messages 210

B %

Back 193Switches off the Voice Con-trol System (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)

Multifunction steering wheel 33

At a

gla

nce

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page

: Audio system/COMAND;see the separate operatinginstructions

; c Seat heating 100

= s Seat ventilation 101

? c PARKTRONIC 173

Function Page

A £ Hazard warninglamps 113

B 4 5 Indicator lamp 47

C M Dynamic drivingpackage with sports mode 170

D å AMG vehicles: ESP® 68

34 Center consoleAt

a g

lanc

e

Center console, lower section

Function Page

E Stowage compartment 249Ashtray 254Cigarette lighter 255

F Selector lever 143

G Cup holder 253

H Stowage compartment withMedia Interface 249

Function Page

I Audio/COMAND control-ler; see the separate oper-ating instructions

J Ú Selects the drive pro-gram 145

Center console 35

At a

gla

nce

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: u Switches the rear-compartment interior light-ing on/off 116

; | Switches the auto-matic interior lighting con-trol on/off 116

= p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 115

? 3 Opens/closes thepanorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel with rollersunblinds 91

A ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 261

B G SOS button (mbracesystem) 259

Function Page

C Rear-view mirror 104

D Buttons for the garage dooropener 268

E Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system),telephone and the VoiceControl System1

F F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbrace sys-tem) 260

G p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 115

H c Switches the frontinterior lighting on/off 116

1 The Voice Control System is only available in combination with COMAND. Please observe the separate oper-ating instructions.

36 Overhead control panelAt

a g

lanc

e

Door control panel

Function Page

: Opens the door 81

; %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 81

= Adjusts the seats electri-cally 98

? r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors and steer-ing wheel 107

Function Page

A 7Zö\Adjusts and folds the exte-rior mirrors in/out electri-cally 104

B W Opens/closes theside windows 87

C o Opens the trunk lid 85

Door control panel 37

At a

gla

nce

38

Useful information .............................. 40Panic alarm .......................................... 40Occupant safety .................................. 40Children in the vehicle ........................ 58Pets in the vehicle ............................... 63Driving safety systems ....................... 63Protection against theft ..................... 71

39

Safe

ty

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press ! button : forapproximately one second.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed.

X To deactivate: press ! button :again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO,X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.

The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehi-cle.

Occupant safety

Overview of occupant safetyIn this section, you will learn the most impor-tant facts about the restraint system compo-nents of the vehicle.The restraint system consists of:Rseat beltsRchild restraint systemsRLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchorsAdditional protection is provided by:RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)RNECK-PRO head restraintsRair bag system components with:

- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp- front-passenger seat with Occupant

Classification System (OCS)The different air bag systems work independ-ently of each other. The protective functionsof the system work in conjunction with eachother. Not all air bags are always deployed inan accident.

G WARNINGModifications to or work improperly conduc-ted on restraint system components or theirwiring, as well as tampering with interconnec-ted electronic systems, can lead to therestraint systems no longer functioning asintended.Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices(ETDs), for example, could deploy inadver-tently or fail to deploy in accidents althoughthe deceleration threshold for air bag deploy-ment is exceeded. Therefore, never modifythe restraint systems. Do not tamper withelectronic components or their software.

i For information on infants and childrentraveling with you in the vehicle restraintsystems for infants and children, see "Chil-dren in the vehicle" .

40 Occupant safetySa

fety

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

IntroductionSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with:RThe 6 SRS warning lampRAir bagsRAir bag control unit (with crash sensors)REmergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for

seat beltsRSeat belt force limitersSRS reduces the risk of vehicle occupantscoming into contact with parts of the vehi-cle's interior in the event of an accident. It canalso reduce the forces to which vehicle occu-pants are subjected during an accident.

SRS warning lamp

G WARNINGIf SRS is malfunctioning, restraint systemcomponents may be triggered unintentionallyor might not be triggered at all in the event ofan accident with a high rate of vehicle decel-eration. There is an increased risk of injury,possibly even fatal.Have SRS checked and repaired immediatelyat a qualified specialist workshop.

SRS functions are checked regularly whenyou switch on the ignition and when theengine is running. Therefore, malfunctionscan be detected in good time.The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out no later than a few secondsafter the engine is started.The SRS components are in operational read-iness when the 6 SRS warning lamp goesout while the engine is running.

There is a malfunction if:Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light

up when the ignition is switched onRthe engine is running and the 6 SRS

warning lamp does not go out after a fewsecondsRthe engine is running and the 6 SRS

warning lamp lights up again

Safety guidelines for seat belts, Emer-gency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) andair bags

G WARNINGRDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have

been subjected to stress in an accidentmust be replaced. Their anchoring pointsmust also be checked. Only use seat beltsinstalled or supplied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-

sioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchloratematerial, which may require special han-dling and regard for the environment.Check your national disposal guidelines.California residents, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function

on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETDthat has deployed must be replaced.RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.

They could tear.RDo not make any modification that could

change the effectiveness of the seat belts.RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may

severely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.RNo modifications of any kind may be made

to any components or wiring of the SRS.RDo not change or remove any component or

part of the SRS.RDo not install additional trim material, seat

covers, badges, etc. over the steeringwheel hub, front-passenger front air bag

Occupant safety 41

Safe

ty

Z

cover, outer sides of the seat backrests,door trim panels, or door frame trims.RDo not install additional electrical/elec-

tronic equipment on or near SRS compo-nents and wiring.RKeep area between air bags and occupants

free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,umbrellas, etc.).RDo not hang items such as coat hangers

from the coat hooks or handles over thedoor. These items may be thrown around inthe vehicle and cause head and other inju-ries when the window curtain air bag isdeployed.RAir bag system components will be hot after

an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.RNever place your feet on the instrument

panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a

risk of rendering the SRS inoperative orcausing unintended air bag deployment.Work on the SRS must therefore only beperformed by qualified technicians. Con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.RFor your protection and the protection of

others, when scrapping the air bag unit orETD, our safety instructions must be fol-lowed. These instructions are availablefrom any authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter.RGiven the considerable deployment speed,

required inflation volume, and the materialof the air bags, there is the possibility ofabrasions or other, potentially more seriousinjuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benzstrongly recommends that you inform thesubsequent owner that the vehicle is equip-ped with SRS. Also, refer them to the appli-cable section in the Operator's Manual.

Air bags

Important safety notesThe air bag installation locations are identi-fied by the AIR BAG symbol.

G WARNINGUsing unsuitable seat covers could restrict oreven prevent deployment of the air bags inte-grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, the func-tion of the air bag deactivation system couldbe restricted. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. The seat covers must have a specialtear seam for side impact air bags. Otherwise,the side impact air bags cannot deploy cor-rectly and therefore cannot provide the inten-ded protection in the event of an accident.

G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGAir bags are designed to reduce the incidenceof injuries and fatalities in certain situations:Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front-

passenger front air bags and driver's kneebag)Rside impacts (side impact air bags, window

curtain air bags and pelvis air bags)However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.When the air bags are deployed, a smallamount of powder is released. The powder

42 Occupant safetySa

fety

generally does not constitute a health hazardand does not indicate that there is a fire in thevehicle. In order to prevent potential breath-ing difficulties, you should leave the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so. If you have anybreathing difficulty but cannot get out of thevehicle after the air bag inflates, then get freshair by opening a window or door.

G WARNINGIn order to reduce the potential danger ofinjuries caused during the deployment of thefront air bags, the driver and front passengermust always be correctly seated and weartheir seat belts.For maximum protection in the event of a col-lision, you must always be in the normal seatposition with your back against the backrest.Fasten your seat belt and make sure that it iscorrectly positioned on your body.As the air bag inflates with considerablespeed and force, a proper seating positionand correct positioning of the hands on thesteering wheel will help to keep you at a safedistance from the air bag. Occupants who arenot wearing their seat belt, are not seatedproperly or are too close to the air bag can beseriously injured or killed by an air bag, as itinflates with great force instantaneously:Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly and

in a position that is as upright as possiblewith your back against the backrest.Rmove the driver's seat as far back as pos-

sible, still permitting proper operation ofvehicle controls. The distance from the cen-ter of the driver's chest to the center of theair bag cover on the steering wheel must beat least 10 inches (25 cm). You should beable to accomplish this by adjusting theseat and steering wheel. If you have anydifficulties, please contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Rdo not lean your head or chest close to the

steering wheel or dashboard.Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.

Placing hands and arms inside the rim can

increase the risk and potential severity ofhand/arm injury if the driver front air baginflates.Radjust the front-passenger seat as far back

as possible from the dashboard when theseat is occupied.Roccupants, especially children, should

never place their bodies or lean their headsin the area of the door or the rear side trimpanel where the side impact air baginflates. This could result in serious or fatalinjuries should the side impact air bag bedeployed. Always sit as upright as possible,wear the seat belt properly and use anappropriately sized infant restraint, toddlerrestraint or booster seat recommended forthe size and weight of the child.

Failure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injuries to you or other occupants.If you sell your vehicle, it is important that youmake the buyer aware of this safety informa-tion. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator'sManual.

If the air bags are deployed, you will hear abang, and a small amount of powder may alsobe released. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard and does not indicate that thereis a fire in the vehicle. The dust might causesome temporary breathing difficulty for peo-ple with asthma or other breathing trouble. Toavoid this, you may wish to get out of thevehicle or open the windows as soon as it issafe to do so. The 6 SRS warning lamplights up.The air bags are deployed if the air bag controlunit detects the need for deployment. Only inthe event of such a situation will the air bagsprovide their supplemental protection.If the driver and front passenger do not weartheir seat belts, it is not possible for the airbags to provide their supplemental protec-tion.

Occupant safety 43

Safe

ty

Z

In the event of other types of impacts andimpacts below air bag deployment thresh-olds, the air bags will not deploy. The driverand passenger will then be protected to theextent possible by a properly fastened seatbelt. A properly fastened seat belt is also nee-ded to provide the best possible protection ina rollover.Air bags provide additional protection; theyare not, however, a substitute for seat belts.All vehicle occupants must fasten their seatbelts regardless of whether your vehicle isequipped with air bags or not.It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the airbags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of a crash.

i After an air bag has been deployed, havethe vehicle towed to the nearest qualifiedspecialist workshop, even if your vehicle isready to drive.

Front air bagsThe front air bags increase protection for thedriver's and front passenger's head andchest.

Driver's air bag : deploys in front of thesteering wheel; front-passenger front airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glovebox.

They are deployed:Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of

vehicle acceleration or deceleration in alongitudinal directionRif the system determines that air bag

deployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRindependently of other air bags in the vehi-

cleThe release time of the front air bags isdependent upon the use of the seat belt.Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. In the event of a collision, the air bagcontrol unit evaluates the vehicle decelera-tion. In the first deployment stage, the frontair bag is filled with enough propellant gas toreduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag isfully deployed if a second deployment thresh-old is exceeded within a few milliseconds.The deployment of front-passenger front airbag ; is also influenced by the weight cate-gory of the front passenger, which is deter-mined by the Occupant Classification System(OCS) (Y page 47).The lighter the passenger-side occupant, thehigher the vehicle deceleration rate required(predicted at the start of the impact) for sec-ond stage inflation of the front-passengerfront air bag. In the second stage, the front airbags are inflated with the maximum amountof propellant gas available.The front air bags are not deployed in situa-tions where a low impact severity is predic-ted. You will then be protected by the fas-tened seat belt.The front-passenger front air bag will only bedeployed if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sen-

sor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupiedRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp on the center console is not lit(Y page 47)Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high-

impact severity

44 Occupant safetySa

fety

Driver's knee bagThe driver's knee bag increases protection ofthe driver against:Rknee injuriesRthigh injuriesRlower leg injuries

Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steer-ing column. If, during a frontal collision, thesystem determines that air bag deploymentcan offer additional protection to that provi-ded by the seat belt, driver's knee bag : isdeployed along with the driver's air bag. Driv-er's knee bag : operates best in conjunctionwith correctly positioned and fastened seatbelts.

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUsing unsuitable seat covers could restrict oreven prevent deployment of the air bags inte-grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, the func-tion of the air bag deactivation system couldbe restricted. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-

ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyany more. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. The seat covers must have a specialtear seam for side impact air bags. Otherwise,the side impact air bags cannot deploy cor-rectly and therefore cannot provide the inten-ded protection in the event of an accident.When deployed, the side impact air bags offeradditional protection for the thorax of thevehicle occupants on the side of the vehicleon which the impact occurs. However, theydo not protect the:RheadRneckRarms

Front side impact air bags : and rear sideimpact air bags ; deploy next to the outerseat cushions.The side impact air bags are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rate of

lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration,e.g. in a side impact

Occupant safety 45

Safe

ty

Z

Rindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsSide impact air bags will not deploy in sideimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side is not deployed in the follow-ing situations:ROCS has detected that the front-passenger

seat is unoccupied.Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not fas-

tened.The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless ofwhether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Pelvis air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers could restrict or evenprevent the deployment of the air bags inte-grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, the func-tion of the Occupant Classification System(OCS) could be restricted. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Pelvis air bag deployment enhances the levelof protection of the vehicle occupants on theside of the vehicle on which the impactoccurs.

Pelvis air bags : deploy next to and belowthe outer seat cushions. They are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rate of

lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration,e.g. in a side impactRindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsPelvis air bags : will not deploy in sideimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger sideis not deployed in the following situations:ROCS has detected that the front-passenger

seat is unoccupied.Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not fas-

tened.The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger sidewill deploy if the front-passenger seat belt isfastened, regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.

Window curtain air bagsThe window curtain air bags enhance the levelof protection for the head, but not chest orarms, of the vehicle occupants on the side ofthe vehicle on which the impact occurs.The window curtain air bags are integratedinto the side of the roof frame and deploy inthe area extending from the front door (A-pil-lar) to the rear sidewall (C-pillar).

46 Occupant safetySa

fety

Window curtain air bags : are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rate of

lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration,e.g. in a side impactRregardless of whether the front-passenger

seat is occupiedRindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsWindow curtain air bags : will not deploy inthe event of impacts which do not exceed thesystem's preset deployment thresholds forvehicle acceleration/deceleration. You willthen be protected by the fastened seat belt.

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

How the Occupant Classification Sys-tem worksThe Occupant Classification System (OCS)categorizes the occupant on the front-passenger seat using a weight sensor. Thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivatedautomatically for certain weight categories.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampshows you the current status. If thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp islit, the passenger air bag is disabled.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe pelvis air bag

Rthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning DevicesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin a position that is as upright as possible

with their back against the seat backrestRwith their feet on the floorThe OCS weight sensor reading is affected ifthe occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. byleaning on the armrest.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover orthe seat cushion are damaged, have the nec-essary repair work carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat accessoriesthat have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.Both the driver and the front passengershould always observe the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp as an indication ofwhether or not the front passenger is posi-tioned correctly. Observe also the air bag dis-play messages that can be displayed in theinstrument cluster (Y page 217).

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminateswhen an adult or someone larger than a smallindividual is in the front passenger seat, havethe front passenger reposition himself or her-self in the seat until the 45 indicatorlamp goes out.In the event of a collision, the air bag controlunit will not allow front passenger front air bagdeployment when the OCS has classified thefront passenger seat occupant as weighing asmuch as or less than a typical 12-month-oldchild in a standard child restraint or if the frontpassenger seat is classified as being empty.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified asbeing up to or less than the weight of a typical12-month-old child in a standard childrestraint, the 45 indicator lamp willilluminate when the engine is started and

Occupant safety 47

Safe

ty

Z

remain illuminated. This indicates that thefront passenger front air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat is classified as being empty,the 45 indicator lamp will illuminatewhen the engine is started and remain illumi-nated. This indicates that the front passengerfront air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified asbeing heavier than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard childrestraint or as being a small individual (suchas a young teenager or a small adult), the45 indicator lamp will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds when the engine isstarted. Depending on occupant weight sen-sor readings from the seat, it will then remainilluminated or go out. With the 45indicator lamp illuminated, the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. Withthe 45 indicator lamp out, the frontpassenger front air bag is activated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as anadult or someone larger than a small individ-ual, the 45 indicator lamp will illumi-nate for approximately six seconds when theengine is started and then go out. This indi-cates that the front passenger front air bag isactivated.If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,the front passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted and will not be deployed.If the 45 indicator lamp is not illumi-nated, the front passenger front air bag isactivated and will be deployedRin the event of certain frontal impactsRif the impact exceeds a predetermined trig-

gering thresholdRindependent of the side impact air bag or

pelvis air bag

If the front passenger front air bag isdeployed, the rate of inflation will be influ-enced byRthe rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed

by the air bag control unitRthe front passenger's weight category as

identified by the OCS

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seats whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated and prop-erly secured in an appropriate infant restraint,toddler restraint, or booster seat recommen-ded for the size and weight of the child.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchorsand Top Tether strap, fully in accordance withthe child seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the following impor-tant information when circumstances requireyou to place a child in the front-passengerseat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag tech-

nology designed to deactivate the front-passenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front-passenger seat.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the

front-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passenger

48 Occupant safetySa

fety

front air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installed inyour vehicle. The only means to eliminatethis risk completely is never to place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in the front-passenger seat. We therefore strongly rec-ommend that you always place a child in arear-facing child restraint on the rear seat.RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on

the front-passenger seat, make sure the45 indicator lamp is illuminated,indicating that the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated. Should the 45indicator lamp not illuminate or go out whilethe restraint is installed, please checkinstallation. Periodically check the45 indicator lamp while driving tomake sure that the 45 indicatorlamp is illuminated. If the 45 indi-cator lamp goes out or remains out, do nottransport a child on the front-passengerseat until the system has been repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child

restraint on the front-passenger seat:- move the seat as far back as possible- use the proper child restraint recommen-

ded for the age, size and weight of thechild

- secure child restraint with the vehicle'sseat belt according to the child seat man-ufacturer's instructions

RFor children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front-passenger frontair bag may or may not be activated.

If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bagwill also deploy.

The OCS may have detected that the seat:Ris empty or occupied by the weight of a

typical child up to twelve months old,seated in a child restraint system.Ris occupied by a small individual, such as a

young teenager or a small adult.Ris occupied by a child in a child restraint

system whose weight is greater than that ofa typical twelve month old child.

These are examples of when the OCS deacti-vates the front-passenger front air bag. Deac-tivation takes place although the collision ful-fills the criteria for deploying the driver's airbag.

If the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock or is in position 0, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up.

G WARNINGIf the red 6 SRS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and the 45 indica-tor lamp light up simultaneously, the OCS ismalfunctioning. The front passenger front airbag will be deactivated in this case. Have thesystem checked by qualified technicians assoon as possible. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Only have the seat repaired or replaced at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Occupant safety 49

Safe

ty

Z

In order to ensure proper operation of the airbag system and OCS:RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a

position that is as upright as possible withyour back against the seat backrest.RWhen seated, a passenger should not posi-

tion him/herself in such a way as to causethe passenger's weight to be lifted from theseat cushion as this may result in the OCSbeing unable to correctly approximate thepassenger's weight category.RRead and observe all warnings in this chap-

ter.

System self-testThe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up if you:Rturn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lockRpress the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button

once or twice on vehicles with KEYLESS-GOWhen an adult is sitting correctly on the front-passenger seat and is categorized by the OCSsystem as an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp lights up and goes offagain after approximately six seconds.If the seat is not occupied and the OCS sys-tem classifies the front-passenger seat asbeing empty, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp will continue to light up and notgo out.

G WARNINGIf the 4 5 indicator lamp does not illu-minate, the system is not functioning. Youmust contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter before seating any child on the frontpassenger seat.

For more information about the OCS, see"Problems with the Occupant ClassificationSystem" (Y page 51).

G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect OCS oper-

ation. This could result in the front-passengerair bag not functioning as intended during anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far aspossible, be resting on the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. Always comply with thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.

50 Occupant safetySa

fety

Problems with the Occupant Classification System

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlights up and remainson.The person on thefront-passenger seat:Rhas the weight of a

typical adultRhas been determined

by the system not tobe a child

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure that the front passenger is sitting in a correct, upright

position.X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display (Y page 217).

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typicaladult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do notallow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp does not light upand/or stays on.The front-passengerseat is:RunoccupiedRoccupied with a

weight up to that of atypical twelve-month-old child in astandard childrestraint system

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the

child seat.X Make sure that the backrest and base of the child restraint sys-

tem are resting securely on the front-passenger seat. If neces-sary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that theseat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat beltbeing pulled too tightly.

X Check the installation of the child restraint system.X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto

the seat.X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, have

the OCS system checked as soon as possible at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. Do not transport a child on the front-passengerseat until the OCS has been repaired.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 217).

Occupant safety 51

Safe

ty

Z

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passenger seat,do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)

Introduction

PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures toprotect occupants in certain hazardous sit-uations.

Important safety notes

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmoving the seats back. There is a risk thatthe seats and/or the objects could be dam-aged.

Despite your vehicle being equipped with thePRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of per-sonal injuries occurring as a result of an acci-dent cannot be eliminated.Always adapt your driving style to suit theprevailing road and weather conditions andmaintain a safe distance from the vehicle infront. Drive carefully.

Function

PRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when

BAS is activated.Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys-

ical limits are exceeded and the vehicleundersteers or oversteers severely.Rvehicles with the Driving Assistance

package: when BAS PLUS intervenes pow-erfully or the radar sensor system detectsan imminent danger of collision in certainsituations.

PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detec-ted:Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.Ron vehicles with memory function for the

front-passenger seat: the front-passengerseat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorableposition.Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows are

closed so that only a small gap remains.The panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is completely closed.

If the hazardous situation passes withoutresulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackensthe belt pre-tensioning. All settings made byPRE-SAFE® can then be reversed.If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:X Move the seat backrest or seat back

slightly when the vehicle is stationary.The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced andthe locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Moreinformation about seat-belt adjustment canbe found under "Seat-belt adjustment"(Y page 56).

NECK-PRO head restraintsThe NECK-PRO head restraints increase pro-tection for the driver's and front passenger'shead and neck. In the event of a rear collisionof a certain severity, the NECK-PRO headrestraints on the driver's and the front-passenger seats are moved forwards andupwards. This provides better head support.

52 Occupant safetySa

fety

G WARNINGThe function of the head restraint may beimpaired if you:Rattach objects such as coat hangers to the

head restraints, for exampleRuse head restraint coversIf you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfilltheir intended protective function in the eventof an accident. In addition, objects attachedto the head restraints could endanger othervehicle occupants. There is an increased riskof injury.Do not attach any objects to the headrestraints and do not use head restraint cov-ers.

NECK-PRO head restraints reduce the likeli-hood of head and chest injuries. The NECK-PRO head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats are moved forwards andupwards in the event of a rear-end collision ofa certain severity. This provides better headsupport.If the NECK-PRO head restraints have beentriggered in an accident, you must reset theNECK-PRO head restraints on the driver’s andfront-passenger seat (Y page 53). Other-wise, the additional protection will not beavailable in the event of another rear-end col-lision. You can recognize that NECK-PROhead restraints have been triggered by thefact that they have moved forwards and canno longer be adjusted.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe NECK-PRO head restraints checked forfunctionality at a qualified specialist work-shop after a rear-end collision.

Resetting triggered NECK-PRO headrestraints

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe NECK-PRO head restraints checked forfunctionality at a qualified specialist work-shop after a rear-end collision.

i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraintsrequires a lot of strength. If you have diffi-culty resetting the NECK-PRO headrestraints, have this work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Do not insert your finger between the uphols-tery of the head restraint and the seat. Payparticular attention while resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints.X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint

cushion forwards in the direction ofarrow :.

X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushiondown as far as it will go in the direction ofarrow ;.

X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion back in the direction of arrow =until the cushion engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the secondNECK-PRO head restraint.

Seat belts

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint sys-tems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEven where this is not required by law, allvehicle occupants should correctly fastentheir seat belts before starting the journey.

Occupant safety 53

Safe

ty

Z

i See "Children in the vehicle" for furtherinformation on infants and children travel-ing in the vehicle as well as on childrestraint systems.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely

dirty, bleach or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged or

extremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt

anchorages or inertia reels have been modi-fied

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage inan accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-sioning Devices could accidentally trigger orfail to deploy when necessary. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approvedfor your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Any such

modifications could invalidate the vehicle'sgeneral operating permit.The use of seat belts and child restraint sys-tems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEven where this is not required by law, allvehicle occupants should correctly fastentheir seat belts before starting the journey.

i See "Children in the vehicle" for furtherinformation on infants and children travel-ing in the vehicle, as well as on childrestraint systems.

Proper use of the seat belts

G WARNINGUSE SEAT BELTS PROPERLYRSeat belts can only work when used prop-

erly. Never wear seat belts in any other waythan as described in this section, as thatcould result in serious injuries in the eventof an accident.REach occupant should wear their seat belt

at all times, because seat belts help reducethe likelihood of and potential severity ofinjuries in accidents, including rollovers.The integrated restraint system includesSRS (driver front air bag, driver's side kneebag, front-passenger front air bag, sideimpact air bags, pelvis air bags, windowcurtain air bags for the side windows),Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat beltforce limiters, and front seat knee bolsters.The system is designed to enhance the pro-tection offered to properly belted occu-pants in certain frontal (front air bags, driv-er's side knee bag, and ETDs) and side (sideimpact air bags, pelvis air bags, windowcurtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts whichexceed preset deployment thresholds.RNever wear the shoulder belt under your

arm, across your neck or off your shoulder.

54 Occupant safetySa

fety

In a frontal crash, your body would movetoo far forward. That would increase thechance of head and neck injuries. The seatbelt would also apply too much force to theribs or abdomen, which could severelyinjure internal organs such as your liver orspleen.Adjust the seat belt so that the shouldersection is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder. It should nottouch the neck. Never pass the shoulderportion of the seat belt under your arm.RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips and not across the abdomen. Ifthe lap belt is positioned across your abdo-men, it could cause serious injuries in acrash.RNever wear seat belts over rigid or breaka-

ble objects in or on your clothing, such aseyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these mightcause injuries.RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted

snugly. Take special care of this when wear-ing loose clothing.RNever use a seat belt for more than one

person at a time. Do not fasten a seat beltaround a person and another person orother objects at the same time.RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a

crash, you would not have the full width ofthe seat belt to distribute impact forces.The twisted seat belt against your bodycould cause injuries.RPregnant women should also always use a

lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portionshould be positioned as low as possible onthe hips to avoid any possible pressure onthe abdomen.RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is

as upright as possible.RCheck your seat belt during travel to make

sure it is properly positioned.RNever place your feet on the instrument

panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always

keep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant

restraints, toddler restraints, or children inbooster seats, always follow the child seatmanufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. Theycould tear.Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in thedoor or in the seat adjustment mechanism.This could damage the seat belt.Never attempt to make modifications to seatbelts. This could impair the effectiveness ofthe seat belts.

Fastening seat belts

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated and prop-erly secured in an appropriately sized childrestraint system or booster seat recommen-ded for the size and weight of the child. Foradditional information, see the "Children inthe vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is sig-nificantly increased if the child restraints arenot properly secured in the vehicle and/or thechild is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Occupant safety 55

Safe

ty

Z

X Adjust the seat and move the backrest toan almost vertical position (Y page 96).

X Pull the seat belt smoothly through beltsash guide :.

X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder sec-tion of the seat belt across the middle ofyour shoulder and the lap section acrossyour pelvis.

X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.Seat-belt adjustment: if necessary, thedriver's and front-passenger seat beltsautomatically adjust to the upper body(Y page 56).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecurely fasten child restraint systems in thevehicle. For further information on specialseat belt retractors, see (Y page 61).For more information about releasing the seatbelt with release button ?, see "Releasingseat belts" (Y page 56).

Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment function adjusts thedriver's and front-passenger seat belt to theupper body of the occupants.

The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle

andRthe ignition is switched onThe seat-belt adjustment will apply a retrac-tion force if any slack is detected between theoccupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on tothe seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. Youcan switch the seat-belt adjustment on andoff in the on-board computer (Y page 206).The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Moreinformation about PRE-SAFE® can be found inthe "PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant pro-tection system)" section (Y page 52).

Releasing seat belts

X Press release button ? on belt buckle =.X Guide belt tongue ; to belt sash guide :.

i If you have guided the seat belt back, it isturned 180°. This is necessary in order toguarantee that the seat belt is not twistedand that it is routed correctly when the beltis fastened.

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,

56 Occupant safetySa

fety

the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-aged seat belts can no longer fulfill theirprotective function and must be replaced.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerRegardless of whether the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already been fas-tened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lightsup for six seconds each time the engine isstarted. It then goes out if the driver and thefront passenger have already fastened theirseat belts.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened whenthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. This warning tone stops aftera maximum of six seconds or once the driv-er's seat belt is fastened.If after six seconds the driver or frontpassenger have not fastened their seat beltsand the doors are closed, the 7 seat beltwarning lamp lights up:Runtil the driver's or front passenger's seat

belt is fastenedRif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is

exceeded, a warning tone also sounds withincreasing intensity for a maximum of60 seconds or until the driver or front-passenger seat belt has been fastened

If the driver/front passenger unfasten theirseat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and awarning tone sounds again.The warning tone ceases even if the driver orfront-passenger seat belt has still not beenfastened after 60 seconds. The 7 seat beltwarning lamp stops flashing but remains illu-minated.After the vehicle comes to a standstill, thewarning tone is reactivated and the 7 seatbelt warning lamp flashes again if the vehiclespeed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).

The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goesout if:Rboth the driver and the front passenger

have fastened their seat belts.orRthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seatbelts" (Y page 234).

Emergency Tensioning Devices, seatbelt force limiters

G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-sioning Devices which have been triggeredimmediately replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,do not insert the belt tongue into the buckleof the front-passenger seat. This may oth-erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer-gency Tensioning Device in the event of anaccident, which will then need to bereplaced.

i Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: an electricmotor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trigger thetightening of the seat belt in hazardous sit-uations. This procedure is reversible.

The seat belts are equipped with ETDs andseat belt force limiters.The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,pulling them close against the body.The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat posi-tions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants backtowards the backrest.

Occupant safety 57

Safe

ty

Z

The ETDs can only be activated when:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe restraint systems are operational; see

"SRS warning lamp "(Y page 41)Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on

each of the lap-shoulder belts in the frontRthe front-passenger seat is occupied and

the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe front-passenger side

The ETDs on the seats in the rear compart-ment are triggered independently of the lockstatus of the seat belts.The Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig-gered depending on the type and severity ofan accident, if:Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end colli-

sion, the vehicle decelerates or acceleratesrapidly in a longitudinal direction during theinitial stages of the impactRin the event of a side impact, the vehicle

decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a lat-eral direction on the side opposite theimpact

If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard and does not indicate that thereis a fire in the vehicle. The dust might causesome temporary breathing difficulty for peo-ple with asthma or other breathing trouble. Toavoid this, you may wish to get out of thevehicle or open the windows as soon as it issafe to do so. The 6 SRS warning lamplights up.If the seat belt is also equipped with a seatbelt force limiter and this is triggered, theforce exerted by the seat belt on the vehicleoccupant is reduced.The seat belt force limiters for the front seatsare synchronized with the front air bags,which absorb part of the deceleration force.This results in the force exerted on the occu-pant being distributed over a greater area.

Children in the vehicle

Child restraint systems

Important safety notesMercedes-Benz recommends that you alwaysproperly secure all infants and children with achild or infant seat restraint system for thetrip.The use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesInfants and children must always be seated inan appropriate infant or child restraint systemrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. The infant or child restraint systemmust be properly secured in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions.All infant or child restraint systems must meetthe following standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-

ards 213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 210.2Confirmation that the child restraint systemcorresponds to the standards can be foundon an instruction label on the child restraintsystem. This confirmation can also be foundin the installation instructions that are inclu-ded with the child restraint system.Always read and follow the manufacturer'sinstructions when using an infant or childrestraint system or booster seat.Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-rior or on the infant or child restraint.

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the front seatingposition. Thus, we strongly recommend thatchildren be placed in the rear seats whenever

58 Children in the vehicleSa

fety

possible. Regardless of seating position, chil-dren 12 years old and under must be seatedand properly secured in an appropriate infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and top tether strap, or lower anchors andtop tether strap, fully in accordance with thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the following impor-tant information when circumstances requireyou to place a child in the front passengerseat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag tech-

nology designed to deactivate the frontpassenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12‑month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front passenger seat.RFor children larger than the typical

12‑month-old child, the front passengerfront air bag may or may not be activated.Always make sure the 4 5 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the

front passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installed inyour vehicle. The only means to completelyeliminate this risk is to never place a child ina rear-facing child restraint in the frontseat. We therefore strongly recommend

that you always place a child in a rear-facingchild restraint in a backseat.RIf you must install a rear-facing child

restraint on the front passenger seatbecause circumstances require you to doso, make sure the 4 5 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.Should the 4 5 indicator lamp notilluminate or go out while the restraint isinstalled, please check installation. Period-ically check the 4 5 indicator lampwhile driving to make sure the 4 5indicator lamp is illuminated. If the 45 indicator lamp goes out or remainsout, do not transport a child on the frontpassenger seat until the system has beenrepaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you have to place a child in a forward-

facing child restraint on the front passengerseat, move the seat as far back as possible,use the proper child restraint recommen-ded for the age, size and weight of the child,and secure child restraint with the vehicle'sseat belt according to the child seat man-ufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system isalways resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original cover

Children in the vehicle 59

Safe

ty

Z

designed for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

The securing systems of child restraint sys-tems are:Rthe seat belt systemRthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsRthe Top Tether anchorages

G WARNINGInfants and small children should never sharea seat belt with another occupant. In the eventof an accident, they could be crushedbetween the occupant and seat belt.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is sig-nificantly increased if the child restraints are

not properly secured in the vehicle and/or thechild is not properly secured in the childrestraint.Children that are too large for a child restraintmust travel in seats using normal seat belts.Position the shoulder belt across the chestand shoulder, not the face or neck. A boosterseat may be necessary to achieve proper seatbelt positioning for children over 41 lbs(18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a boosterseat.When the child restraint is not in use, removeit from the vehicle or secure it with the seatbelt to prevent the child restraint from becom-ing a projectile in the event of an accident.

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out of

park position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

60 Children in the vehicleSa

fety

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:X Secure the child with a child or infant seat

restraint system appropriate to the age andweight of the child.

X Make sure that the infant or child is prop-erly secured at all times while the vehicle isin motion.

Special seat belt retractorAll seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat belt retrac-tor ensures that the seat belt will not slackenonce the child restraint system has beensecured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the manufacturer's

installation instructions.X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat

belt retractor.X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt

buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seat

belt retractor retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is activated.

X Push down on the child restraint system totake up any slack.

Removing a child restraint system/deactivat-ing the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the manufacturer's

installation instructions.X Press the release button on the belt buckle,

hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it backtowards the belt sash guide.The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-ted.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in aportion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivatethe special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchorsin the rear

G WARNINGChildren that are too large for a child restraintmust travel in seats using normal seat belts.Position shoulder belt across the chest andshoulder, not face or neck.A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where alap/shoulder belt fits properly without a boos-ter.

Children in the vehicle 61

Safe

ty

Z

Install the child restraint system in accord-ance with the manufacturer's instructions.Attach the child restraint system to bothsecuring rings.An incorrectly installed child restraint systemcould come loose during an accident and seri-ously or even fatally injure the child.Child restraint systems or child seat securingrings that are malfunctioning or damaged asthe result of a collision must be replaced.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. Securing rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems areinstalled on the left and right of the rear seats.Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats mayalso be used and can be installed using thevehicle's seat belt system. Install the childseat according to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.The securing rings on the rear seats are cov-ered by an upholstered lining.

Installation instructions : indicate theinstallation location of securing rings 2.X Fold upholstery cover = and the Velcro

fastener down.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child

restraint systems on both securingrings ;. Comply with the manufacturer'sinstructions when installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system.

Top Tether

G WARNINGIf the rear seat backrests are not locked, theycould fold forwards in the event of an acci-dent, heavy braking or sudden changes ofdirection. As a result, child restraint systemscannot perform their intended protectivefunction. Rear seat backrests that are notlocked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.in the event of an accident. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri-fication indicator. Adjust the rear seat backr-ests so that they are in an upright position.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged andlocked, this will be shown in the multifunctiondisplay in the instrument cluster. A warningtone also sounds.Top Tether provides an additional connectionbetween a child restraint system, securedwith a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount,and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk ofinjury even further.The Top Tether anchorage points are installedin the rear compartment behind the headrestraints.

X Press down the rear of cover ; in thedirection of the arrow.Cover ; is raised slightly at the front.

X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage=.

62 Children in the vehicleSa

fety

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system with Top Tether. Alwayscomply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructionswhen doing so.

X Top Tether belt with one belt strap: routeTop Tether belt A centrally over headrestraint :.

orX Top Tether belt with two belt straps:

route one Top Tether belt A to the left andone to the right past the side of headrestraint :.

X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tetheranchorage =.

X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is nottwisted.

X Tension Top Tether belt A. Always complywith the child restraint system manufactur-er's installation instructions when doing so.

X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchor-age =.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.

As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, thereby

endangering other road usersUnsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

(Y page 64)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 64)RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus)

(Y page 65)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

(Y page 66)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)

(Y page 69)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 70)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 70)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if youare inattentive, the driving safety systems canneither reduce the risk of an accident noroverride the laws of physics. Driving safetysystems are merely aids designed to assistdriving. You are responsible for the distanceto the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed andfor braking in good time. Always adapt yourdriving style to suit the prevailing road,

Driving safety systems 63

Safe

ty

Z

weather and traffic conditions and maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in front. Drivecarefully.The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when there isadequate contact between the tires and theroad surface. Please pay special attention tothe notes on tires, recommended minimumtire tread depths, etc. (Y page 302).In wintry driving conditions, always use wintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snowchains. Only in this way will the driving safetysystems described in this section work aseffectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering the vehi-cle when braking.The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignitionis switched on. It goes out when the engine isrunning.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 236) and

display messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 211).ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi-tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even ifyou only brake gently.

BrakesX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the

brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-tion of hazardous road conditions, and func-tions as a reminder to take extra care whiledriving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency braking situa-tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,BAS automatically boosts the braking force,thus shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

64 Driving safety systemsSa

fety

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until

the emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS)

General information

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles equip-ped with DISTRONIC PLUS.For BAS PLUS to assist you, the radar sensorsystem must be operational.With the help of the radar sensor system, BASPLUS can detect obstacles that are in thepath of your vehicle for an extended period oftime.If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning,BAS PLUS will not be available. The brakesystem is still available with complete brakeboosting effect and BAS.BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk ofa collision with a vehicle or reduce the effectsof such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects adanger of collision, you are assisted whenbraking.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identifyobjects and complex traffic situations.In such cases, BAS PLUS may:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in allcritical situations. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system isalso impaired in the event of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for

example in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a

motorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different line

relative to the center of your vehicleFollowing damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.

FunctionTo avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates thebrake force necessary if:Ryou approach an obstacle, andRBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collisionWhen driving at a speed under 20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brakepressure will be carried out at the last possi-ble moment.

Driving safety systems 65

Safe

ty

Z

When driving at a speed above 20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedalsharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises thebrake pressure to a value adapted to the traf-fic situation.BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-ardous situations with vehicles in front withina speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and155 mph (250 km/h).At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph(70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also react to sta-tionary objects. Examples of stationaryobjects are stopped or parked vehicles.

i If BAS PLUS demands particularly highbraking force, preventative passenger pro-tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activa-ted simultaneously.

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-tion as usual again, if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your

vehicle.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between the tires andthe road surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. The engine output is also modified tokeep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver whenpulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®

can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehi-cles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside. In addition, more drive torque is trans-ferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.

ETS (Electronic Traction System)

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehi-cles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside. In addition, more drive torque is trans-ferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! If you test the parking brake using a brakedynamometer, switch the ignition off.Application of the brakes by ESP® may oth-erwise destroy the brake system.

66 Driving safety systemsSa

fety

Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the noteson ESP® (Y page 297) when towing the vehi-cle with a raised rear axle.ESP® is only deactivated if the å warninglamp is lit continuously.If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warn-ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is notavailable due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 238) and display messages whichmay be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 211).

i Only use wheels with the recommendedtire sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP® warning lamp goes outbefore beginning the journey, ESP® is auto-matically active.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-

stances.X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as

necessary when pulling away.X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-

ing road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehiclestops moving. The engine starts automati-cally when the driver wants to pull away again.ESP® remains in its previously selected sta-tus. Example: if ESP® was deactivated beforethe engine was switched off, ESP® remainsdeactivated when the engine is switched onagain.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (exceptAMG vehicles)

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Y page 63).You can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheelstarts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

You can activate and deactivate ESP® usingthe on-board computer (Y page 201).ESP® deactivated:The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.ESP® activated:The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Driving safety systems 67

Safe

ty

Z

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster does not flash. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is restricted to a limited

degree and the drive wheels are able tospin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.Rtraction control is still activated.RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it

activated if you brake firmly and ESP®

intervenes.RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it

is also not activated if you brake firmly andESP® intervenes.RESP® still provides support when you

brake.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMGvehicles)

Important safety notesYou can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RSPORT handling mode is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGWhen SPORT handling mode is activated,there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-dents.Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-uations described in the following.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

In the following situations, it may be better toactivate SPORT handling mode or deactivateESP®:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelRon designated roads when the vehicle's

own oversteering and understeering char-acteristics are desired

Driving in SPORT handling mode or withoutESP® requires an extremely qualified andexperienced driver.

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheelstarts to spin.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To activate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button :.The M SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

68 Driving safety systemsSa

fety

The SPORT handling mode messageappears in the multifunction display.

X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button :.The M SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

X To deactivate ESP®: press button : untilthe å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights upin the instrument cluster.The ÷ OFF message appears in the mul-tifunction display.

X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The ÷ESP® ON message appears in the multifunc-tion display.

Characteristics of activated SPORT han-dling modeIf SPORT handling mode is activated and oneor more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®

warning lamp in the instrument clusterflashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to alimited degree.When SPORT handling mode is activated:RESP® only improves driving stability to a

limited degree.Rtraction control is still activated.Rengine torque is restricted to a limited

degree and the drive wheels are able tospin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.RESP® still provides support when you

brake.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster does not flash. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.

If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is restricted to a limited

degree and the drive wheels are able tospin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.Rtraction control is still activated.RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it

activated if you brake firmly and ESP®

intervenes.RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it

is also not activated if you brake firmly andESP® intervenes.RESP® still provides support when you

brake.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brake pres-sure on the rear wheels to improve drivingstability while braking.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 236) as well as dis-play messages (Y page 212).

Driving safety systems 69

Safe

ty

Z

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. In addi-tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKEalso has the HOLD function (Y page 171) andhill start assist (Y page 138). For furtherinformation, see "Driving tips" (Y page 157).

PRE-SAFE® Brake

General information

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driv-ing, the radar sensor system must be opera-tional.With the help of the radar sensor system,PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles thatare in front of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimizethe risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead, andreduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision,you will be warned visually and acoustically aswell as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE®

Brake cannot prevent a collision without yourintervention.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi-cle by a partial application of the brakes if adanger of collision is detected. There may bea collision unless you also brake. Automaticemergency braking cannot prevent a colli-sion. There is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself and try totake evasive action.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-tify objects and complex traffic conditions.In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and then

brake the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

In order to maintain the appropriate distanceto the vehicle in front and thus prevent a col-lision, you must apply the brakes yourself.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neithergive warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system isalso impaired in the event of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for

example in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a

motorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different line

relative to the center of your vehicleFollowing damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation of

70 Driving safety systemsSa

fety

the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-

tivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 201).If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, theæ symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),this function warns you if you rapidlyapproach a vehicle in front. An intermittentwarning tone will then sound and the ·distance warning lamp will light up in theinstrument cluster.X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to do

so.

PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicleautomatically under the following conditions:Rthe driver and front-passenger have their

seat belts fastenedandRthe vehicle speed is between approx-

imately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph(200 km/h)

At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph(70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detectstationary objects. Examples of stationaryobjects are stopped or parked vehicles.

i If there is an increased risk of collision,preventive passenger protection measures(PRE-SAFE®) are activated.

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in frontremains and you do not brake, take evasiveaction or accelerate significantly, the vehiclemay perform automatic emergency braking,up to the point of full brake application. Auto-matic emergency braking is not performed

until immediately prior to an imminent acci-dent.You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-SAFE® Brake at any time by:Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.Ractivating kickdown.Rreleasing the brake pedal.The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake isended automatically if:Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in

front of your vehicle.

Protection against theft

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.X To activate with the SmartKey: remove

the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the

ignition off and open the driver's door.X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Theengine can be started by anyone with a validSmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be star-ted (yet the vehicle's battery is charged),the system is not operational. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

Protection against theft 71

Safe

ty

Z

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe trunk lidRthe hoodThe alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that triggered it, forexample.

i If the alarm continues for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency callsystem automatically notifies the Cus-tomer Assistance Center. This is doneeither by text message or data connection.The emergency call system sends the mes-sage or data provided that:Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace ser-

vice.Rthe mbrace service has been activated

properly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network is

available.

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKeyor KEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm sys-tem is armed after approximately15 seconds.

X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

X To stop the alarm using the SmartKey:insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the % or & button on the

SmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. The Smart-Key must be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-

board. The SmartKey must be inside thevehicle.The alarm is switched off.

72 Protection against theftSa

fety

Useful information .............................. 74SmartKey ............................................. 74Doors .................................................... 80Trunk .................................................... 83Side windows ...................................... 86Sliding sunroof .................................... 90

73

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out of

park position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strongmagnetic fields. Otherwise, the remotecontrol function could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in thevicinity of powerful electrical installations.RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:

- with electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKey

- with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoil

- inside metallic objects e.g. a metal caseThis can affect the functionality of theSmartKey.

SmartKey functionsThe SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flap

: & To lock the vehicle; F To unlock the trunk lid= % To unlock the vehicle

74 SmartKeyOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

The turn signals flash once when unlockingand three times when locking.When it is dark, the surround lighting alsocomes on if it is activated in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 204).You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated usingthe on-board computer (Y page 205).X To unlock centrally: press the % but-

ton.

If you do not open the vehicle within approx-imately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked againRprotection against theft is reactivated.X To lock centrally: press the & button.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY-LESS-GO key in the vehicle.

Locking/unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carrythe SmartKey with you. You can combine thefunctions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a con-ventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle byusing KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock itusing the & button on the SmartKey.When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,the distance between the SmartKey and thecorresponding door handle must not begreater than 3 ft (1 m).

KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid Smart-Key is in the vehicle by periodically establish-ing a radio connection between the vehicleand the SmartKey. This happens:Rwhen the external door handles are

touchedRwhen starting the engineRwhile the vehicle is in motion

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-face :.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface ; for an exten-ded period.

Further information on the convenience clos-ing feature (Y page 88).If you pull on the handle of the trunk lid, onlythe trunk of the vehicle is unlocked.

Deactivating and activatingIf you do not intend to use the vehicle for alonger period of time, you can deactivate KEY-LESS-GO. The SmartKey will then use very lit-tle power, thereby conserving battery power.For the purposes of activation/deactivation,the vehicle must not be nearby.

SmartKey 75

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

X To deactivate: press the & button onthe SmartKey twice in rapid succession.The battery check lamp of the SmartKey(Y page 77) lights up twice briefly andKEYLESS-GO is deactivated.

X To activate: press any button on theSmartKey or insert the SmartKey into theignition lock.KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated fea-tures are available again.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystem

You can change the settings of the lockingsystem. This means that only the driver's doorand the fuel filler flap are unlocked when thevehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you fre-quently travel on your own.X To change the setting: press and hold

down the % and & buttons simulta-neously for approximately six seconds untilthe battery check lamp (Y page 77)flashes twice.

i If the setting of the locking system ischanged within the signal range of the vehi-cle, pressing the & or % button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the % but-ton twice.

X To lock centrally: press the & button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-lows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch the

inner surface of the door handle on thedriver's door.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-face of the front-passenger door handle.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles(Y page 75).

X To restore the factory settings: pressand hold down the % and & buttonssimultaneously for approximately six sec-onds until the battery check lamp flashestwice.

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO key, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door or the trunk lid, theanti-theft alarm system will be triggered(Y page 72).X To end the alarm: insert the SmartKey into

the ignition lock.i With KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/

Stop button from the ignition lock before-hand.

If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlockedautomatically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the

SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

76 SmartKeyOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

X Push release catch : in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removemechanical key ; from the SmartKey.

Inserting the mechanical keyX Push mechanical key ; completely into

the SmartKey until it engages, and releasecatch : is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notesMercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe batteries replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seek medical attentionimmediately.

Checking the battery

X Press the & or % button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp : lights up briefly.If battery check lamp : does not light upbriefly during the test, the battery is dis-charged.

i If the SmartKey battery is checked withinthe signal reception range of the vehicle,pressing the & or % button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

X Change the battery (Y page 77).

i You can get a battery at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-

Key (Y page 76).

X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKeyopening in the direction of the arrow untilbattery compartment cover : opens. Donot hold battery compartment cover :closed while doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover :.

SmartKey 77

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery = falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free clothto do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery compart-ment cover : into the housing first andthen press to close it.

X Insert mechanical key ; into the Smart-Key (Y page 76).

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

78 SmartKeyOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You cannot lock orunlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control

function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at thedriver's door handle from close range and press the % or& button.

If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 77) and replace it if nec-

essary (Y page 77).X Lock (Y page 82) or unlock (Y page 82) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Lock (Y page 82) or unlock (Y page 82) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing KEYLESS-GO.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of

the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's doorhandle from close range and press the % / & button.

There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of

the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's doorhandle from close range and press the % / & button.

X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 77) and replace it if nec-

essary (Y page 77).X Lock (Y page 82) or unlock (Y page 82) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.

You have lost a Smart-Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work-shop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

SmartKey 79

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior

lighting, and try to start the engine again.If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary

(Y page 291).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 294).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The steering lock is mechanically blocked.X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While

doing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.

The engine cannot bestarted using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey is inthe vehicle.

A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected aseasily.X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out of

park position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines(Y page 248).

80 DoorsOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe inside

You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.Only open the door when the traffic situationpermits.If the vehicle has been locked with the Smart-Key or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door fromthe inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm sys-tem. Switch off the alarm (Y page 72).

X To unlock a front door: pull door han-dle ;.Locking knob : pops up.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X To open a front door: pull door handle ;.

X To unlock a rear door: pull up lockingknob :.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X To open a rear door: pull door handle ;.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the inside

You can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally fromthe inside if the vehicle has been locked withthe SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

X To unlock: press button :.X To lock: press button ;.

If the front-passenger door is closed, thevehicle locks.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not belocked or unlocked.You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.Only open the door when the traffic situationpermits.If the vehicle was previously locked with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening thevehicle from the inside will activate the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm(Y page 72).If a locked door is opened from the inside, theprevious unlock status of the vehicle will betaken into consideration if:Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking

button for the central locking, orRif the vehicle was locked automaticallyThe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had pre-viously been fully unlocked. If only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked, only thedoor which has been opened from the insideis unlocked.If the vehicle has been locked centrally withthe SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it is notunlocked when the release button for thecentral locking is used.

Doors 81

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

Automatic locking featureThe vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the vehicle'swheels are turning at a speed in excess of9 mph (15 km/h).You could therefore be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.

X To deactivate: press and hold button :for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button ; forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons and donot hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.

You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-board com-puter (Y page 205).

Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-ical key)

If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 72).X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-

Key (Y page 76).X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of

the driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwiseas far as it will go to position 1.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key (Y page 76).

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey, use the mechanical key.X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door and the

trunk lid.X Press the locking button (Y page 81).X Check whether the locking knob on the

front-passenger door is still visible. Pressthe locking knob down by hand, if neces-sary (Y page 81).

X Close the driver's door.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-

Key (Y page 76).X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of

the driver's door as far as it will go.

82 DoorsOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far asit will go to position 1.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lidare locked.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key (Y page 76).

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

Trunk

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid(Y page 349).

You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines(Y page 248).Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. Youcould otherwise lock yourself out.The trunk lid can be:Ropened and closed manually from outsideRopened automatically from outsideRopened automatically from insideRlocked separatelyRunlocked with the mechanical keyRopened with the emergency release button

Trunk lid reversing featureThe trunk lid is equipped with an automaticreversing feature. It reacts if a solid objectobstructs or restricts the trunk lid during theclosing procedure. The trunk lid opens againautomatically. The automatic reversing fea-ture is only an aid and is not a substitute foryour attentiveness to the trunk lid while it isclosing.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-

gersRover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing

movementThis means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.

Trunk 83

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, orRpull or press the remote operating switch

on the driver's door orRpress the closing or locking button on the

trunk lid, orRpull on the trunk lid handle

Opening/closing from outside

OpeningX Press the % button on the SmartKey.

X Pull handle :.X Raise the trunk lid.

Closing

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess :.X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the &

button on the SmartKey (Y page 74) or withKEYLESS-GO (Y page 75).

i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in thetrunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked andwill open again.

Opening automatically from outside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.Rpull or press the remote operating switch

on the driver's door.Rpress the closing or locking button on the

trunk lid.Rpull the trunk lid handle.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid(Y page 349).

84 TrunkOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

OpeningYou can open the trunk lid automaticallyusing the SmartKey or the handle in the trunklid.X Press and hold the F button on the

SmartKey until the trunk lid opens.orX If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lid

handle and let it go again immediately.

Opening automatically from inside

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid(Y page 349).

You can open the trunk lid from the driver'sseat when the vehicle is stationary andunlocked.

X To open: pull remote operating switch fortrunk lid : until the trunk lid opens.

Locking the trunk separatelyYou can lock the trunk separately. If you thenunlock the vehicle centrally, the trunkremains locked and cannot be opened.X Close the trunk lid.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-

Key (Y page 76).

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise fromposition 1 to position 2.

X Remove the mechanical key.X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-

Key.

Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)! The trunk lid swings upwards when

opened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

If the trunk cannot be unlocked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechani-cal key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm systemwill be triggered (Y page 72).X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-

Key (Y page 76).X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid

lock as far as it will go.

Trunk 85

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

X Turn the mechanical key from position 1counter-clockwise as far as it will go toposition 2.The trunk is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back to position1 and remove it.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key.

i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 82),the trunk is also locked.

Trunk emergency releaseYou can open the trunk lid from inside thevehicle with the emergency release button.

X Press emergency release button : briefly.The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked and openedwith the trunk lid emergency release whenthe vehicle is stationary or while driving.

Trunk lid emergency release light:Remergency release button : flashes for

30 minutes after the trunk lid is openedRemergency release button : flashes for

60 minutes after the trunk lid is closedThe trunk lid emergency release does notopen the trunk lid if the battery is disconnec-ted or discharged.

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the side window again.

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, release theswitch or press the switch down to open theside window again.

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

86 Side windowsOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out of

park position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a side window during theclosing process, the side window opens againautomatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing a side window.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-

gersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing

movementRduring resettingRwhen closing the side window again man-

ually immediately after automatic reversingThis means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win-dows

: Left; RightThe switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch forthe front-passenger side window on the front-passenger door.The switches on the driver's door take prec-edence.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X To open: press the corresponding switch.X To close: pull the corresponding switch.i If you press/pull the switch beyond the

point of resistance, automatic operation isstarted in the corresponding direction. Youcan stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again.

i You can continue to operate the side win-dows after you switch off the engine orremove the SmartKey. This function isavailable for up to five minutes or until thedriver's or front-passenger door is opened.

Convenience openingYou can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do this, the SmartKey is used tocarry out the following functions simultane-ously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windows

Side windows 87

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblindRswitch on the seat ventilation for the driv-

er's seat

i The convenience opening feature canonly be operated using the SmartKey. TheSmartKey must be close to the driver'sdoor handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Press and hold the % button until theside windows and the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are in the desiredposition.

If the roller sunblind of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel is closed, theroller sunblind is opened first.X Press and hold the % button again until

the panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the % button.

Convenience closing feature

General notesWhen you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-neously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panelYou can then close the roller sunblind.

G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trappedin the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.

Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:

With the SmartKey:Rrelease the & button.Rpress and hold the % button until the

side windows and the sliding sunroof or thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel open again.

Using KEYLESS-GO:Rrelease the sensor surface on the door han-

dle.Rpull the door handle immediately and hold

it.The side windows and the sliding sunroof orthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel open.

Using the SmartKey

i The SmartKey must be close to the driv-er's door handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Press and hold the & button until theside windows and the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are closed.

X Press and hold the & button again untilthe roller sunblind of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel closes.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release the & button.

Using KEYLESS-GOThe KEYLESS-GO key must be outside thevehicle. All the doors must be closed.

88 Side windowsOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

X Touch recessed sensor surface : on thedoor handle until the side windows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are fully closed.

i Make sure you only touch recessed sen-sor surface :.

X Make sure that all the side windows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface : on thedoor handle again until the roller sunblindof the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel closes.

X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on thedoor handle.

Resetting the side windowsYou must reset each side window if a sidewindow can no longer be closed fully.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Pull the corresponding switch on the door

control panel until the side window is com-pletely closed (Y page 87).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switch

on the door control panel until the side win-dow is completely closed (Y page 87).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the corresponding side window remains

closed after the button has been released,the side window has been reset correctly. Ifthis is not the case, repeat the steps aboveagain.

Problems with the side windowsProblem: a side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide.X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.Problem: a side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediatelyafter it has been blocked or reset, the sidewindow closes with increased or maximumforce. The reversing feature is then not active.Parts of the body could be trapped in the clos-ing area in the process. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in theclosing area. To stop the closing process,release the switch or push the switch again toreopen the side window.

If a side window is obstructed during closingand reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull

the corresponding switch again until theside window has closed.The side window is closed with increasedforce.

Side windows 89

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

If a side window is obstructed again duringclosing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull

the corresponding switch again until theside window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Sliding sunroof

Important safety notesIn the following section, the term "sliding sun-roof" refers to the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel.

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closing pro-cedures.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push the

switch briefly in any directionThe opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free ofsnow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions mayoccur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals couldbe damaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that thesliding sunroof is closed when you leave thevehicle. The vehicle electronics can bedamaged if water enters the vehicle inte-rior.

i Resonance noises can occur in addition tothe usual airflow noises when the slidingsunroof is open. They are caused by minorpressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.Change the position of the sliding sunroofor open a side window slightly to reduce oreliminate these noises.

Sliding sunroof reversing featureThe sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the sliding sunroof duringthe closing process, the sliding sunroof opensagain automatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing the sliding sunroof.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-

gersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing

movementRduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man-

ually immediately after automatic reversingThis means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push the

switch briefly in any directionThe closing process is stopped.

90 Sliding sunroofOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

Operating the sliding sunroof

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lowerThe sliding sunroof can only be operatedwhen the roller sunblind is open.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-

sponding direction.i If you press the 3 switch beyond the

point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corre-sponding direction. You can stop automaticoperation by pressing/pulling the switchagain.

Operating the roller sunblind for thesliding sunroof

General notesThe roller sunblind shields the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The roller sunblind can only beopened and closed when the sliding sunroofis closed.

G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roller sunblind,parts of the body could be trapped betweenthe roller sunblind and the frame or slidingsunroof. There is a risk of injury.

When opening or closing make sure that noparts of the body are in the sweep of the rollersunblind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push the

switch briefly in any directionThe opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

Roller sunblind reversing featureThe roller sunblind is equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the roller sunblind duringthe closing process, the roller sunblind opensagain automatically. The automatic reversingfeature is only an aid and is not a substitutefor your attentiveness to the roller sunblindwhile it is closing.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-

gersRwhen closing the roller sunblind again man-

ually immediately after automatic reversingThis means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push the

switch briefly in any directionThe closing process is stopped.

Sliding sunroof 91

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

Opening and closing

Overhead control panel: Opens; Opens= ClosesX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-

sponding direction.i If you press the 3 switch beyond the

point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corre-sponding direction. You can stop automaticoperation by pressing/pulling the switchagain.

Resetting the sliding sunroof and theroller sunblindReset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun-blind if the sliding sunroof or the roller sun-blind does not move smoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point

of resistance in the direction of arrow =until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.

X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-tional second.

X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow =until the roller sunblind is fully closed.

X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-tional second.

X Make sure that the sliding sunroof(Y page 91) and the roller sunblind(Y page 92) can be fully opened again.

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

! If the sliding sunroof and the roller sun-blind cannot be fully closed or reset, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

Problems with the sliding sunroofProblem: the sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

G WARNINGIf you close the sliding sunroof again immedi-ately after it has been blocked or reset, thesliding sunroof closes with increased or max-imum force. The reversing feature is then notactive. Parts of the body could be trapped inthe closing area in the process. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in theclosing area.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push the

switch briefly in any directionThe closing process is stopped.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed duringclosing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof

blocks, pull the 3 switch in the over-head control panel down to the point ofresistance and hold it until the sliding sun-roof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed with increasedforce.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again dur-ing closing and then reopens slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof

blocks, pull the 3 switch in the over-head control panel down to the point of

92 Sliding sunroofOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

resistance and hold it until the sliding sun-roof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed without theanti-entrapment feature.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot beopened or closed as a result of a malfunc-tion, contact a qualified specialist work-shop.

Sliding sunroof 93

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

94

Useful information .............................. 96Correct driver's seat position ............ 96Seats .................................................... 97Steering wheel .................................. 102Mirrors ............................................... 104Memory function ............................... 107

95

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Correct driver's seat position

X Observe the safety guidelines on seatadjustment (Y page 97).

X Make sure that seat = is adjusted prop-erly.Manual and electrical seat adjustment(Y page 98)Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 98)

When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag

as possible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.

Ryou have moved the backrest to an almostvertical position.Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that

your thighs are gently supported.Ryou can depress the pedals properly.X Check whether the head restraint is adjus-

ted properly.When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level by thecenter of the head restraint.

X Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 102).

X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjus-ted properly.Adjusting the steering wheel manually(Y page 102)Adjusting the steering wheel electrically(Y page 103)

When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your

arms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-

ment cluster clearly.X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts

(Y page 53).X Check whether you have fastened seat

belt ; properly (Y page 55).The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of your shoul-

derRbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip

jointsX Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mir-

ror and the exterior mirrors in such a waythat you have a good view of road and traf-fic conditions (Y page 104).

X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror

96 Correct driver's seat positionSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

settings with the memory function(Y page 107).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there isno SmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf the driver's seat is not engaged, it couldmove unexpectedly while the vehicle is inmotion. This could cause you to lose control ofthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Always make sure that the driver's seat isengaged before starting the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under the

lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 42) and "Children in the vehicle" .

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If

liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not

switch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;

see the "Interior care" section.Rdo not transport heavy loads on the

seats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do

not cover the seats with insulating mate-rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-ers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmoving the seats back. There is a risk thatthe seats and/or the objects could be dam-aged.

i Vehicles without the through-loading fea-ture: the head restraints cannot beremoved from the rear compartment seats.For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Seats 97

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

i Further related subjects:RRear bench seat through-loading feature

(Y page 250)

Adjusting the seats manually andelectrically

You can only adjust the front-passenger seatmanually and electrically.

: Backrest angle; Seat height= Seat cushion angle? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

i Adjust the seat cushion angle so that yourthighs are lightly supported.

Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentX Lift handle ? and slide the seat forwards

or rearwards.X Release lever ? again.

Make sure that you hear the seat engage inposition.

Seat cushion angleX Turn handwheel = in the desired direction.

Adjusting the seats electrically

: Head restraint height; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angle

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 107).

Adjusting the head restraints

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed and adjus-ted correctly, they cannot provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

98 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Do not rotate the head restraints of the frontand rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjustthe height and angle of the head restraints tothe correct position.Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust thehead restraint so that it is as close as possibleto your head.Pay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 97).

Adjusting the height of the headrestraints electricallyX To adjust the head restraint height: slide

the switch for head restraint adjustment(Y page 98) up or down in the direction ofthe arrow.

Folding the front seat backrestsforward/back

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the backrest is not engaged, it could foldforwards during a braking maneuver or in theevent of an accident, for example. The seatbackrest will then push the vehicle occupantagainst the seat belt. The seat belt can nolonger offer the intended level of protectionand could even cause injuries. There is anincreased risk of injury.Before each journey, make sure that the back-rest engages fully as described.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrest

is in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Folding the seat backrest forwardThe seat moves forwards if:Ryou have folded the backrest forwards andRthe seat is in the rear half of the adjustment

range.This makes it easier for passengers to get intoand out of the rear compartment. The headrestraint is lowered simultaneously.

X Pull seat release handle : forwards andfold the backrest forwards as far as it willgo.The seat automatically moves to the fore-most position and the head restraint is low-ered.

Folding the seat backrest backX Swing back the seat backrest.

The seat moves automatically to the storedposition.

Seats 99

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimumsupport for your back.

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contour

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Driver's and front-passenger seat

The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximatelyeight minutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 20 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).X To switch on: press button : repeatedly

until the desired heating level is set.X To switch off: press button : repeatedly

until all the indicator lamps go out.

100 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The seat heating hasswitched off prema-turely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as

the rear window defroster or interior lighting.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Switching on/offThe three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the ventilation level you have selec-ted.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).

X To switch on: press button : repeatedlyuntil the desired ventilation level is set.

i You can open the front side windows andthe sliding sunroof using the "Convenienceopening" feature (Y page 87). The seat ven-tilation of the driver's seat automaticallyswitches to the highest level.

X To switch off: press button : repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

Seats 101

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Problems with the seat ventilation

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The seat ventilation hasswitched off prema-turely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as

the rear window defroster or interior lighting.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf the steering wheel is unlocked while thevehicle is in motion, it could change positionunexpectedly. This could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Before starting off, make sure the steeringwheel is locked. Never unlock the steeringwheel while the vehicle is in motion.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel canstill be adjusted when there is no SmartKey inthe ignition lock.

Adjusting the steering wheel man-ually

G WARNINGIf the steering wheel is unlocked while thevehicle is in motion, it could change positionunexpectedly. This could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Before starting off, make sure the steeringwheel is locked. Never unlock the steeringwheel while the vehicle is in motion.

: Release lever; To adjust the steering wheel height= To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)X Push release lever : down completely.

The steering column is unlocked.X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired

position.X Push release lever : up completely.

The steering column is locked.X Check if the steering column is locked.

When doing so, try to push the steering

102 Steering wheelSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

wheel up or down or try to move it in thefore-and-aft direction.

Adjusting the steering wheel electri-cally

: To adjust the steering wheel height; To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)The steering wheel can also be adjusted whenthe SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock.

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

(Y page 103)RStoring settings (Y page 107)

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.

If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function position

buttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-

ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes gettingin and out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board com-puter (Y page 205).

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel swings upwards whenyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO in

position 1Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is

in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock(Y page 135)

i The steering wheel only moves upwards ifit has not already reached the upper stop.

Position of the steering wheel for driv-ingThe steering wheel is moved to the last selec-ted position when:Rthe driver's door is closedRyou insert the SmartKey into the ignition

lock

Steering wheel 103

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

orRyou press the Start/Stop button once on

vehicles with KEYLESS-GOWhen you close the driver's door with theignition switched on, the steering wheel isalso automatically moved to the previouslyset position.The last position of the steering wheel isstored when you switch off the ignition orwhen you store the setting with the memoryfunction (Y page 107).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature istriggered in an accident, the steering columnwill move upwards when the driver's door isopened. This occurs irrespective of the posi-tion of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Thismakes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescuethe occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature isonly operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-ture is activated in the on-board computer.

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever :forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.The exterior mirrors are automatically heatedafter starting the vehicle if the rear windowdefroster is switched on and the outside tem-perature is low. Heating takes a maximum of10 minutes.

i You can also heat up the exterior mirrorsmanually by switching on the rear windowdefroster.

104 MirrorsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).

X Press button : for the left-hand exteriormirror or button ; for the right-hand exte-rior mirror.The indicator lamp in the correspondingbutton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button = as longas the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button = up, down, or tothe left or right until you have adjusted theexterior mirror to the correct position. Youshould have a good overview of traffic con-ditions.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectricallyThis function is only available in vehicles forCanada.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).

X Briefly press button :.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 9 mph(15 km/h), you can no longer fold in theexterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrorsThis function is only available in vehicles forCanada.If the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors mustbe reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwisenot fold in when you select the "Fold in mir-rors when locking" function in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 206).X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

1 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).X Briefly press button :.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyThis function is only available in vehicles forCanada.If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer(Y page 206):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as

soon as you lock the vehicle from the out-side.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat-

ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle andthen open the driver's or front-passengerdoor.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

Mirrors 105

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically folding

exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-rior mirrors2: press and hold mirror-fold-ing button until you hear a click followed byan impact sound. (Y page 105)The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 104).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNINGElectrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyteis harmful and causes irritation. It must notcome into contact with your skin, eyes, res-piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the electrolyte,observe the following:RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin

immediately with water.RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of

your eyes thoroughly with clean water.RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately

rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do notinduce vomiting.RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your

skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medicalattention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with electrolyte.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical

attention immediately.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare mode if the following conditions are metsimultaneously:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes the

sensor in the rear-view mirror.The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged.

Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gearYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store this posi-tion.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 135).

X Press button ; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button = to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.

2 Only for Canada.

106 MirrorsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving posi-tion.

Using the memory buttonYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. This setting can bestored using memory button M ?.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).X With the exterior mirror on the front-

passenger side activated, use adjustmentbutton = to adjust the exterior mirror. Inthe exterior mirror, the rear wheel and thecurb should be visible.

X Press memory button M ? and one of thearrows on adjustment button = withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps.

Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 135).X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-

passenger side using button ;.X Engage reverse gear.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph

(15 km/h)Rif you press button : for the exterior mir-

ror on the driver's side

Memory function

Storing settings

G WARNINGIf you use the memory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen the memory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The memory function can be used at any time,e.g. even when the key isn't in the ignitionlock.With the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for three dif-ferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and head

restraintRdriver's side: steering wheel positionRdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-

rors on the driver's and front-passengersides

Memory function 107

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

X Adjust the seat (Y page 98).X On the driver's side, adjust the steering

wheel (Y page 103) and the exterior mirrors(Y page 104).

X Briefly press the M memory button andthen press storage position button 1, 2 or 3within three seconds.The settings are stored in the selected pre-set position, and a confirmation tonesounds.

Calling up a stored setting! If you want to move the seat from the fully

reclined position to a stored seat position,first raise the backrest. The seat could oth-erwise be damaged.

X Press and hold the relevant storage posi-tion button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steeringwheel and exterior mirrors are in the storedposition.

i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage positionbutton.

108 Memory functionSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Useful information ............................ 110Exterior lighting ................................ 110Interior lighting ................................. 115Replacing bulbs ................................. 116Windshield wipers ............................ 120

109

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switchedon even during the daytime. In some coun-tries, operation of the headlamps varies dueto legal requirements and self-imposed obli-gations.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 112)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 203)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-

led by the light sensor5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lampC N Fog lamp (only vehicles with front

fog lamps)If you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch to Ã.The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey in

position 0

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set to Ã, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

110 Exterior lightingLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.Ã is the favored light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selected accord-ing to the brightness of the ambient light(exception: poor visibility due to weather con-ditions such as fog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:

the parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.RWith the engine running: if you have acti-

vated the "Daytime running lamps" func-tion via the on-board computer, the day-time running lamps or the parking lampsand the low-beam headlamps are switchedon or off automatically depending on thebrightness of the ambient light.

X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã.

Canada only:The daytime running lamps improve the visi-bility of your vehicle during the day. The day-time running lamps function is required by lawin Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if you move the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in bright ambient light: if youturn the light switch to T, the daytimerunning lamps and parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.USA only:The daytime running lamps improve the visi-bility of your vehicle during the day. To do this,the daytime running lamps function must beswitched on using the on-board computer(Y page 203).

If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

Low-beam headlampsG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set to Ã, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

Even if the light sensor does not detect that itis dark, the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps switch on when the ignition isswitched on and the light switch is set to theL position. This is a particularly usefulfunction in the event of rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:

turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The green L indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Front fog lampsIn conditions where visibility is poor due tofog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improve vis-ibility as well as making it easier for other roadusers to see you. They can be operatedtogether with the parking lamps or togetherwith the parking lamps and low-beam head-lamps.X To switch on the front fog lamps: turn

the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.

Exterior lighting 111

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

X Press the N button.The green N indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

X To switch off the front fog lamps: pressthe N button.The green N indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Only vehicles with front fog lamps have thefog lamps function.

Rear fog lampThe rear fog lamp improves visibility of yourvehicle for the traffic behind in the event ofthick fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear foglamps.X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn the

SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.X Press the R button.

The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Parking lamps! If the battery has been excessively dis-

charged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always parkyour vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid thecontinuous use of the T parking lampsfor several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch to T.The green indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illumina-ted.

X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is inposition 0.

X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combination

switch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow ; or ?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow ; or ?.

High-beam headlampsX To switch on the high-beam headlamps:

turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.X Press the combination switch beyond the

pressure point in the direction of arrow :.In the à position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched on when it is darkand the engine is running.

112 Exterior lightingLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the high-beam head-lamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam head-lamps: move the combination switch backto its normal position.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, itcontrols activation of the high-beam head-lamps (Y page 114).

High-beam flasherX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the

ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch in the directionof arrow =.

Hazard warning lamps

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployed orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a

speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a standstill

X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :.All turn signals flash. If you now switch on aturn signal using the combination switch,

only the turn signal lamp on the corre-sponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:press button :.

The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-matically if the vehicle reaches a speed ofabove 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a fullbrake application.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.

Headlamp cleaning systemThe headlamps are cleaned automatically ifthe "Wipe with washer fluid" function is oper-ated five times while the lights are on and theengine is running (Y page 120). When youswitch off the ignition, the automatic head-lamp cleaning system is reset and counting isresumed from 0.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better vis-ibility in tight bends, for example. The corner-ing light function can only be activated whenthe low-beam headlamps are switched on.

Exterior lighting 113

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph

(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between

25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)and turn the steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off afterno more than three minutes.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notesYou can use this function to set the head-lamps to change between low beam and highbeam automatically. The system recognizesvehicles with their lights on, either approach-ing from the opposite direction or traveling infront of your vehicle, and consequentlyswitches the headlamps from high beam tolow beam.The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on the dis-tance to the other vehicle. Once the systemno longer detects any other vehicles, it reac-tivates the high-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead controlpanel.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAdaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognizeroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assistmay fail to recognize other road users thathave lights, or may recognize them too late. Inthis or similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated oractivated regardless. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. Youare responsible for adjusting the vehicle'slighting to the prevailing light, visibility andtraffic conditions.

114 Exterior lightingLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe restricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or

snowRdirt on the sensors or the sensors are

obscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assiston/offX To activate: turn the light switch to Ã.X Press the combination switch beyond the

pressure point in the direction of arrow :(Y page 112).The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-tion display lights up if it is dark and thelight sensor activates the low-beam head-lamps.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 28 mph (45 km/h):The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between thevehicle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 35 mph (55 km/h) and no otherroad users have been detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 30 mph (45 km/h) or other roadusers have been detected or the roads areadequately lit:The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out. The _indicator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To deactivate: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-tion display goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideCertain climatic and physical conditions maycause moisture to form in the headlamp. Thismoisture does not affect the functionality ofthe headlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

: u Switches the rear interior lightingon/off

; | Switches the automatic interiorlighting control on/off

= p Switches the right-hand front read-ing lamp on/off

? c Switches the front interior lightingon/off

A p Switches the left-hand front readinglamp on/off

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeunless the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

Interior lighting 115

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

Automatic interior lighting controlX To activate/deactivate: press the |

button.When the automatic interior lighting con-trol is activated, the button is flush with theoverhead control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockThe interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the igni-tion lock. You can activate this delayedswitch-off using the on-board computer(Y page 204).

Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the interior lighting on/off:

press the c button.X To switch the reading lamps on/off:

press the p button.

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsive

emergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the

SmartKey.

Replacing bulbs

Important safety notes

Xenon bulbs

G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can getan electric shock if you remove the cover of

the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con-tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.Never touch the parts or the electrical con-tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work onthe Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,you can recognize this by the following: thecone of light from the Xenon bulbs movesfrom the top to the bottom and back againwhen you start the engine. For this to beobserved, the lights must be switched onbefore starting the engine.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Other bulbs

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or ifits glass tube has been scratched.The bulb may explode if:Ryou touch itRit is hotRyou drop itRyou scratch itOnly operate bulbs in enclosed lampsdesigned for that purpose. Only install sparebulbs of the same type and the specified volt-age.Marks on the glass tube reduce the servicelife of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tubewith your bare hands. If necessary, clean theglass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit andrub it off with a lint-free cloth.

116 Replacing bulbsLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

Protect bulbs from moisture during opera-tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contactwith liquids.There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbsthat you cannot replace. Replace only thebulbs listed (Y page 117). Have the bulbs thatyou cannot replace yourself changed at aqualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb typesYou can change the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

Halogen headlamps: Parking lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W= Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W

Bi-Xenon headlamps: Cornering lamp: H7 55 W

Tail lamps: Backup lamp: P 21 W; Brake lamp: P 21 W= Brake lamp/parking lamp: P 21 W

Changing the front bulbs

Low-beam headlamps (halogen head-lamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.

Replacing bulbs 117

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise andpull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn

it clockwise.X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-

wise until it engages.

High-beam headlamps (halogen head-lamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise

and pull it out.X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and

pull it out.X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn

it clockwise.X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-

wise until it engages.

Parking lamps/standing lamps (halo-gen headlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise

and pull it out.X Pull out bulb holder ;.X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.X Insert bulb holder ;.X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-

wise until it engages.

Cornering light function (Bi-Xenonheadlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise

and pull it out.X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and

pull it out.X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.

118 Replacing bulbsLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn

it clockwise.X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-

wise until it engages.

Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the side trim pan-elsYou must open the side trim panel in the trunkand remove the first-aid kit before you canchange the bulbs in the tail lamps.

Right-hand side trim panel

Left-hand side trim panel (vehicles without a soundsystem)X To open: loosen side trim panel : at the

top and fold it down in the direction of thearrow.

X To close: insert side panel :.

Left-hand side trim panel (vehicles with a soundsystem)X To open: turn rotary catch : 90° in the

direction of the arrow and remove side trimpanel ;.

X To close: insert side trim panel ; and turnrotary catch : 90° in the opposite direc-tion to the arrow.

Tail lampsX Switch off the lights.X Open the trunk.X Open the side trim panel (Y page 119).

X Remove the tail lamp connectorX Simultaneously press retaining lugs : in

the direction of the arrow and slightly pullout the bulb holder with the bulbs.

X Remove the connector for LED light func-tions from the top of the bulb holder.

X Pull the bulb holder out with the bulbs.

Replacing bulbs 119

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

: Backup lamp; Brake lamp= Parking lamp/brake lampX Press the respective bulb :, ; or = back

and turn it counter-clockwise to remove itfrom the bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder andturn it clockwise.

X Reinsert the connector for LED light func-tions in the bulb holder.

X Insert the bulb holder again and lock it inplace.

X Insert the tail lamp connector.X Close the side trim panel (Y page 119).

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperson/off

! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield canscratch the glass if wiping takes place whenthe windshield is dry.If it is necessary to switch on the windshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysuse washer fluid when operating the wind-shield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.

Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/î Wipes the wind-

shield using washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the corre-

sponding position.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: dueto optical influences and the windshieldbecoming dirty in dry weather conditions,the windshield wipers may be activatedinadvertently. This could then damage thewindshield wiper blades or scratch thewindshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automatically accord-ing to the intensity of the rain. In the Åposition, the rain sensor is more sensitivethan in the Ä position, causing the wind-shield wiper to wipe more frequently.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshieldwill no longer be wiped properly. This could

120 Windshield wipersLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

prevent you from observing the traffic condi-tions.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield.Never fold a windshield wiper arm without awiper blade back onto the windshield.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe windshield wiper arm without a wiperblade and it falls onto the windshield, thewindshield may be damaged by the force ofthe impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

Replacing the wiper blades

Removing the wiper bladesX Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO)(Y page 135).

X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-shield until it engages.

X Firmly press release knob : and pull thewiper blade upwards from the wiper arm inthe direction of the arrow.

Installing the wiper bladesX Position the new wiper blade in the retainer

on the wiper arm and slide it into place inthe opposite direction to the arrow.The wiper blade audibly engages.

X Make sure that the wiper blade is seatedcorrectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-shield.

Windshield wipers 121

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshieldwiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the

ignition lock.orX Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the

driver's door.X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist

workshop.

The windshield washerfluid from the spraynozzles no longer hitsthe center of the wind-shield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

122 Windshield wipersLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

Useful information ............................ 124Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 124Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 127Setting the air vents ......................... 131

123

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notesObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows could other-wise fog up.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode only

brieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-

cation functionRswitch on the defrost windshield function

briefly, if requiredClimate control regulates the temperatureand the humidity in the vehicle interior andfilters undesirable substances out of the air.Climate control can only be operated whenthe engine is running. Optimum operation isonly achieved with the side windows and roofclosed.

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using the con-venience opening feature (Y page 87). Thiswill speed up the cooling process and thedesired interior temperature will bereached more quickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most par-ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-

ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol-lutants and odors. A clogged filter reducesthe amount of air supplied to the vehicleinterior. For this reason, you should alwaysobserve the interval for replacing the filter,which is specified in the MaintenanceBooklet. As it depends on environmentalconditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, theinterval may be shorter than stated in theMaintenance Booklet.

124 Overview of climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Canada only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 128); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 129)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 129)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 130)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 128)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 131)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 128)E Increases the airflow (Y page 129)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 129)G Switches climate control on/off (Y page 127)H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 128)

Overview of climate control systems 125

Clim

ate

cont

rol

USA only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 128); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 129)= Switches maximum cooling on/off (Y page 130)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 130)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 128)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 131)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 128)E Increases the airflow (Y page 129)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 129)G Switches climate control on/off (Y page 127)H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 128)

Optimum use of dual-zone climatecontrol

Climate control systemThe following contains notes and recommen-dations on optimum use of dual-zone climatecontrol.RActivate climate control using the à and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in theà and ¿ buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-

tion briefly until the windshield is clearagain.

ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-

perature settings on the driver's side forthe front-passenger side as well. The indi-cator lamp in the á button goes out.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control system only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the full cli-mate control output, you can switch off the

126 Overview of climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 141).

i The ECO start/stop function is not avail-able on AMG vehicles.

Operating the climate control sys-tems

Switching climate control on/off

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, theair supply and air circulation are alsoswitched off. The windows could fog up.Therefore, switch off climate control onlybriefly

i Switch on climate control primarily usingthe à button (Y page 128).

Switching on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 135).X To activate: press the à button.

The indicator lamp in the à button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Press the ^ button.

The indicator lamp in the ̂ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

X To deactivate: press the ^ button.The indicator lamp in the ̂ button lightsup.

Activating/deactivating cooling withair dehumidification

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-

dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica-tion function only briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-tion is only available when the engine is run-ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled anddehumidified according to the temperatureselected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-tion.

Switching on/offX To activate: press the ¿ button.

The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press the ¿ button.The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goesout. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"function has a delayed switch-off feature.

Operating the climate control systems 127

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The indicator lamp inthe ¿ buttonflashes three times orremains off. The "Cool-ing with air dehumidifi-cation" function cannotbe switched on.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to amalfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesIn automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained automatically at a constant level.The system automatically regulates the tem-perature of the dispensed air, the airflow andthe air distribution.The automatic mode functions optimallywhen the "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is activated. If necessary, coolingwith air dehumidification can be deactivated.If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica-tion function only briefly.

Activating/switchingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 135).X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press the à button.

The indicator lamp in the à button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airfloware activated.

X To select manually: press the _ but-ton.

orX Press the K or I button.

The indicator lamp in the à button goesout. Automatic air distribution and airfloware deactivated.

Setting the temperatureDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 135).X To increase/reduce: turn thumbwheel :

or B to the left or right (Y page 125).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settingsP Directs air through the center and side

air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

ventsS Directs air through the center, side and

footwell vents¯ Directs air through the defroster vents

128 Operating the climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

b Directs the airflow through thedefroster, center and side air vents3

a Directs air through the defroster andfootwell vents

_ Directs the airflow through thedefroster, center and side air vents aswell as the footwell air vents3

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the sideair vents. The side air vents can only beclosed when the controls on the side airvents are turned downwards.

AdjustingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 135).X Press the _ button repeatedly until the

desired symbol appears in the display.The indicator lamp in the à button goesout. Automatic control is deactivated andthe air distribution is controlled accordingto the selected setting.

Setting the airflowX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 135).X To increase/reduce: press the K orI button.

If the battery is not sufficiently charged,blower output may be reduced. As soon asthe battery is sufficiently charged, full bloweroutput will be available.

Switching the ZONE function on/offThis function is only available in vehicles forCanada.X To activate: press the á button.

The indicator lamp in the á button lightsup.

The temperature setting for the driver'sside is not adopted for the front-passengerside.

When you press the buttons for temperature,airflow or air distribution, the temperaturesetting on the driver's side is not adopted forthe other climate control zones.X To deactivate: press the á button.

The indicator lamp in the á button goesout.The temperature setting for the driver'sside is adopted for the front-passengerside.

Defrosting the windshieldYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to defrost the inside of the wind-shield and the side windows.

i You should only select the "Windshielddefrosting" function until the windshield isclear again.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 135).

X To activate: press the ¬ button.The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield and

front side windowsRair-recirculation mode off

If the battery is not sufficiently charged,blower output may be reduced. As soon asthe battery is sufficiently charged, full bloweroutput will be available.X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.

The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings are

3 Canada only.

Operating the climate control systems 129

Clim

ate

cont

rol

restored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

orX Press the à button.

The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Turn temperature control : or B counter-

clockwise or clockwise (Y page 125).orX Press the K or I button.

MAX COOL maximum coolingThe MAX COOL function is only available invehicles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.When you activate MAX COOL, climate con-trol switches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode onX To activate: press the Ù button.

The indicator lamp in the Ù button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press the Ù button.The indicator lamp in the Ù button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehu-

midification function.X Activate automatic mode Ã.X Adjust the side air vents so that the warmed

air is directed to the side windows.X If the windows continue to fog up, activate

the ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.

i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Press the _ button repeatedly until theO or P symbol appears in the dis-play.

X Adjust the side air vents so that no air isdirected to the side windows.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,the rear window defroster switches off auto-matically after several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-dow defroster may switch off.

Switching on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 135).X Press the ¤ button.

The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lightsup or goes out.

130 Operating the climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The rear windowdefroster has deactiva-ted prematurely or can-not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading

lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear windowdefroster can be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recircula-tion mode

General notesYou can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odors are entering the vehiclefrom outside. The air already inside the vehi-cle will then be recirculated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows can fog up more quickly, in particu-lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu-lation mode briefly to prevent the windowsfrom fogging up.

Switching on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 135).X To activate: press the g button.

The indicator lamp in the g button lightsup.

i Air-recirculation mode is activated auto-matically at high outside temperatures.When air-recirculation mode is activatedautomatically, the indicator lamp in theg button is not lit.Outside air is added after about30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press the g button.The indicator lamp in the g button goesout.

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles

in the vehicle interior.

i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjustthe sliders of the air vents to the centerposition.

Setting the air vents 131

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

Setting the center air vents

: Center air vent, left; Center air vent, right= Center vent thumbwheel, right? Center vent thumbwheel, leftX To open/close: turn thumbwheels =

and ? up or down.

Setting the side air vents

: Side window defroster vent; Side air vent= Thumbwheel for side air ventX To open/close: turn thumbwheel = to the

left or right.

Setting the glove box air ventWhen automatic climate control is activated,the glove box can be ventilated, for instanceto cool its contents. The level of airflowdepends on the airflow and air distributionsettings.

! Close the air vent when heating the vehi-cle.At high outside temperatures, open the airvent and activate the "cooling with air dehu-midification" function. Otherwise, temper-ature-sensitive items stored in the glovebox could be damaged.

: Air vent thumbwheel; Air ventX To open/close: turn thumbwheel : to the

left or right.

Setting the rear-compartment airvents

: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel; Rear-compartment air vent, right= Rear-compartment air vent, leftX To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or

down.

132 Setting the air ventsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Useful information ............................ 134Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 134Driving ............................................... 135Automatic transmission ................... 143Refueling ............................................ 150Parking ............................................... 153Driving tips ........................................ 155Driving systems ................................ 160

133

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesThe sensor system of some driving and driv-ing safety systems adjusts automaticallywhile a certain distance is being driven afterthe vehicle has been delivered or afterrepairs. Full system effectiveness is notreached until the end of this teach-in proce-dure.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after sev-eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-sate for this by applying greater force to thebrake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi-

cle and engine speeds for the first1000 miles (1500 km).RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),

drive in program E (program C on AMGvehicles).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt-

tle, during this period.

RChange gear in good time, before the tach-ometer needle is Ô of the way to the redarea of the tachometer.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to

brake the vehicle.RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator

pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-down).ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 when driv-

ing slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain.After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and acceleratethe vehicle to full speed.Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehi-cles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph

(140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum

engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RChange gear in good time.

i You should also observe these notes onbreaking in if the engine or parts of the drivetrain on your vehicle have been replaced.

i Always observe the respective speed lim-its.

AMG vehicles with self-locking rearaxle differential

Your vehicle is equipped with a self-lockingdifferential on the rear axle. To protect thedifferential on the rear axle, carry out an oilchange after a breaking-in phase of2,000 miles (3,000 km). This oil change pro-longs the service life of the differential. Havethe oil change carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

134 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicleDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Do not warm up the engine with the vehi-cle stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoidhigh engine speeds and driving at full throt-tle until the engine has reached its operat-ing temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission tothe desired drive position when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temper-atures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximumengine speed is restricted in order to pro-tect the engine. To protect the engine andmaintain smooth engine operation, avoiddriving at full throttle when the engine iscold.

Key positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey(shift the transmission to position P)

1 Power supply for some consumers, suchas the windshield wipers

2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)and drive position

3 To start the engineThe steering is locked when you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

Driving 135

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

i The SmartKey can be turned in the igni-tion lock even if it is not the correct Smart-Key for the vehicle. The ignition is notswitched on. The engine cannot be started.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesRDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:

- with electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKey

- with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoil

- inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal caseThis can impair the functionality of the KEY-LESS-GO key.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped witha SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stop but-ton.The Start/Stop button must be inserted in theignition lock and the SmartKey must be in thevehicle.Pressing the Start/Stop button several timesin succession corresponds to the differentSmartKey positions in the ignition lock. This isonly the case if you are not depressing thebrake pedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-ately.The Start/Stop button can be removed fromthe ignition lock. Then, you can insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

i You do not have to remove the Start/Stopbutton from the ignition lock when youleave the vehicle. You should, however,always take the SmartKey with you whenleaving the vehicle. The vehicle can be star-ted with the Start/Stop button if the Smart-Key is in the vehicle.

: Start/Stop button; Ignition lockX Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition

lock ;.

i When you insert Start/Stop button :into ignition lock ;, the system needsapproximately 2 seconds recognition time.You can then use Start/Stop button :.

Start/Stop button= USA only? Canada onlyIf Start/Stop button : has not yet beenpressed, this corresponds to the SmartKeybeing removed from the ignition.X To switch on the power supply: press

Start/Stop button : once.You can now activate the windshield wip-ers, for example.

i If you then open the driver's door when inthis position, the power supply is deactiva-ted.

136 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button : twice.

i The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button : once

when in this position.As soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. If an indicator lamp does not go out afterstarting the engine or lights up while driving,see (Y page 236).

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out of

park position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

! Do not depress the accelerator whenstarting the engine.

General notes

i The catalytic converter is preheated forup to 30 seconds after a cold start. Thesound of the engine may change during thistime.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P.

The transmission position display in themultifunction display shows P.

i You can also start the engine when thetransmission is in position N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKey

i To start the engine using the SmartKeyinstead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 135) and release it assoon as the engine is running.

Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engineYou can start the engine if a valid SmartKeywith the integrated KEYLESS-GO function is inthe vehicle. Always take the SmartKey withyou when leaving the vehicle, even if you onlyleave it for a short time. Pay attention to theimportant safety notes.

Driving 137

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

i The Start/Stop button can be used tostart the vehicle without inserting theSmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignitionlock and the SmartKey must be in the vehi-cle.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once(Y page 136).The engine starts.

Pulling away

Automatic transmission

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position if youdepress the brake pedal. Only then is theselector lever lock released.X Depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.X Release the parking brake (Y page 154).X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

! If a warning tone sounds and theRelease Park. Brake message appearsin the multifunction display, the parkingbrake is still applied. Release the parkingbrake.

i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.

You can open the doors from the inside atany time.You can also deactivate the automatic lock-ing feature (Y page 205).

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. Itholds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland to depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a

downhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function

IntroductionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stop-ped under certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when thedriver wants to pull away again. The ECOstart/stop function thereby helps you to

138 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

reduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

C 250 and C 250 SportIf the ¤ symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display, the ECO start/stopfunction switches the engine off automati-cally if the vehicle stops moving.Every time you switch on the engine using theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECOstart/stop function is activated.If the ECO start/stop function has been man-ually deactivated (Y page 141) or a malfunc-tion has caused the system to be deactivated,the ¤ symbol is not displayed.

C 350 and C 350 4MATICIf the engine has been switched off automat-ically by the ECO start/stop function, the¤ symbol is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.Every time you switch on the engine using theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECOstart/stop function is activated.

Automatic engine switch-off

C 250 and C 250 SportIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.

The ECO start/stop function is operationaland the ¤ symbol is displayed in green inthe multifunction display, if:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit

green.Rthe outside temperature is within the range

that is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-

ature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior

has been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield is

not fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's

seat belt is fastened.If the conditions for automatic engine switch-off are not all fulfilled, the ¤ symbol isshown in yellow.

i All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine is stopped automatically.

i The HOLD function can be activated if theengine has been switched off automati-cally. It is then not necessary to continueapplying the brakes during the automaticstop phase. When you depress the accel-erator pedal, the engine starts automati-cally and the braking effect of the HOLDfunction is deactivated.

i The engine can be switched off automat-ically a maximum of four times (first stopand three subsequent stops) in succession.The ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in themultifunction display after the engine hasbeen started automatically for the fourthtime. When the ¤ symbol is shown ingreen in the multifunction display, auto-matic engine switch-off is again possible.

Driving 139

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

C 350 and C 350 4MATICIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationalwhen:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit

green.Rthe outside temperature is within the range

that is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-

ature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior

has been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield is

not fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's

seat belt is fastened.

i All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine is stopped automatically.

i The HOLD function can also be activatedif the engine has been switched off auto-matically. It is then not necessary to con-tinue applying the brakes during the auto-matic stop phase. When you depress theaccelerator pedal, the engine starts auto-matically and the braking effect of theHOLD function is deactivated.

i The engine can be switched off automat-ically a maximum of four times (first stopand three subsequent stops) in succession.

Automatic engine start

C 250 and C 250 SportThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function

by pressing the ECO button.Rin transmission position D or N the brake

pedal is released and the HOLD function isnot active.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.Ryou engage reverse gear R.Ryou move the transmission out of position

P.Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the

driver's door.Rthe vehicle starts to roll.Rthe brake system requires this.Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-

ates from the set range.Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-

shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched on.Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low.

i Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not start the engine.

i If you shift the transmission from R to D,the ECO start/stop function is availableagain once the ¤ symbol reappears ingreen in the multifunction display.

C 350 and C 350 4MATICThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function

by pressing the ECO button.Rin transmission position D or N the brake

pedal is released and the HOLD function isnot active.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.Ryou engage reverse gear R.Ryou move the transmission out of position

P.Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the

driver's door.

140 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Rthe vehicle starts to roll.Rthe brake system requires this.Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-

ates from the set range.Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-

shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched on.Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low.

i Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not start the engine.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function

C 250 and C 250 Sport

ECO buttonX To deactivate: press button :.

Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ symbol inthe multifunction display go out.

X To activate: press button :.Indicator lamp ; lights up.If all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 139) are fulfilled, the¤ ECO symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 139) are fulfilled, the¤ ECO symbol is shown in yellow in themultifunction display.If this is the case, the ECO start/stop func-tion is not available.Conditions for the automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 139).

If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or asthe result of a malfunction. The engine willthen not be switched off automatically whenthe vehicle stops.

C 350 and C 350 4MATIC

ECO buttonX To switch off: press button :.

Indicator lamp ; goes out.X To switch on: press button :.

Indicator lamp ; lights up.If the indicator lamp on the ECO button is off,the ECO start/stop function has been deac-tivated manually or as the result of a mal-function.

Driving 141

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock before

attempting to start the engine again.orX Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps

in the instrument cluster go out.X Try to start the engine again (Y page 137). Avoid excessively

long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drainthe battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 294).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two

minutes.X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

142 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine is not run-ning smoothly and ismisfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist

workshop.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-verter and damage it.

The coolant tempera-ture gauge shows avalue above 248 ‡(120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to

cool down.X Check the coolant level (Y page 275). Observe the warning

notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral position N when you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Selector lever

Overview of transmission positions

Example: selector leverj Park position with selector lever lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

Automatic transmission 143

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Transmission position and drive pro-gram display

: Transmission position display; Drive program displayThe current position of the selector lever isshown by the indicators next to the selectorlever.The indicators light up when the SmartKey isinserted into the ignition lock. The indicatorsgo out when the SmartKey is removed fromthe ignition lock.

Transmission positions

B Park positionDo not shift the transmission intoposition P (Y page 153) unless thevehicle is stationary. The parkinglock should not be used as a brakewhen parking. Always apply theparking brake in addition to theparking lock in order to secure thevehicle.The SmartKey can only be removedif the transmission is in position P.If the SmartKey is removed fromthe ignition lock, the selector leveris locked.If the vehicle electronics are mal-functioning, the selector lever maybe locked in position P. To releasea locked selector lever, see "Man-ual override of parking lock"(Y page 150).

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

144 Automatic transmissionDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:shift the transmission to position Nif the vehicle is in danger of skid-ding, e.g. on icy roads.

! Rolling in neutral N can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

Driving tips

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gearshift-ing behavior is determined by:Ra shift range restriction, if selectedRthe selected drive program (Y page 145)Rthe position of the accelerator pedal

(Y page 145)Rthe road speed

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts

AMG vehiclesWhen shifting down, the double-clutch func-tion is active regardless of the currently selec-ted drive program. The double-clutch functionreduces load change reactions and is condu-cive to a sporty driving style. The sound gen-erated by the double-clutch function dependson the drive program selected.

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Program selector button

General notesThe program selector button allows you tochoose between different driving character-istics.

Example: program selector button

E Economy Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

Automatic transmission 145

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 146).

X Press program selector button : repeat-edly until the letter for the desired driveprogram appears in the multifunction dis-play.

AMG vehicles

Drive program selector with manual drive program

C ControlledEfficiency

Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty drivingstyle

M Manual Manual gear shifting

RS RACESTART

Optimal vehicle accelera-tion from a standstill

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 146).

X Turn drive program selector : until thedesired drive program appears in the mul-tifunction display in the speedometer.The drive program indicator on drive pro-gram selector : lights up in red.

i The automatic transmission shifts toautomatic drive program C each time theengine is started.

i RS cannot be selected during normal driv-ing. For further information on RACESTART, see (Y page 172).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

: Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifterIn the automatic drive program, you canrestrict or derestrict the shift range by usingthe steering wheel paddle shifters(Y page 147).In the manual drive program, you can changegear using the steering wheel paddle shiftersor the selector lever (Y page 148).

i You can only change gear with the steer-ing wheel paddle shifters when the trans-mission is in position D.

Automatic drive programDrive program E (drive program C on MAGvehicles) is characterized by the following:Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic

transmission settings.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from

the automatic transmission shifting upsooner.Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in

forward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fully.Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving

stability on slippery road surfaces, forexample.Rthe automatic transmission shifting up

sooner. This results in the vehicle beingdriven at lower engine speeds and thewheels being less likely to spin.

146 Automatic transmissionDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Drive program S (drive programs S and S+ onMAG vehicles) is characterized by the follow-ing:Rsporty engine and automatic transmission

settings.Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear.Rthe automatic transmission shifting up

later.Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher

as a result of the later automatic transmis-sion shift points.

Shift ranges

IntroductionWhen the automatic transmission is in posi-tion D, it is possible to restrict or derestrictthe shift range (Y page 147).The shift range selected is shown in the mul-tifunction display. The automatic transmis-sion shifts only as far as the selected gear.Shift range:

= You can use the engine's brakingeffect

5 You can use the braking effect ofthe engine on downhill gradientsand for driving:Ron steep mountain roadsRin mountainous terrainRin arduous conditions

4 To use the braking effect of theengine on extremely steep downhillgradients and on long downhillstretches

Restricting the shift rangeX Press the selector lever to the left towards

D–.or

X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter.The automatic transmission shifts downone gear and restricts the shift range to therelevant gear.

i If the engine exceeds the maximumengine speed when shifting down, the auto-matic transmission protects against enginedamage by not shifting down.

i If the maximum engine speed for the shiftrange is reached and you continue to accel-erate, the automatic transmission shifts up,even if the shift range is restricted. Thisprevents the engine from overrevving.

Extending the shift rangeX Briefly press the selector lever to the right

towards D+.orX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter.The shift range is derestricted.

Clearing the shift range restrictionX Press and hold the selector lever towards

D+ until D is shown once more in the mul-tifunction display.

orX Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel

paddle shifter until D is shown again in themultifunction display.The automatic transmission shifts from thecurrent shift range directly to D.

Selecting the ideal shift rangeX Press the selector lever to the left towards

D– and hold it in position.orX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter and hold it in position.The automatic transmission shifts to thegear which allows optimum acceleration

Automatic transmission 147

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

and deceleration. To do this, the automatictransmission shifts down one or moregears.

Manual drive program

Switching on the manual drive programThe manual drive program is only available forvehicles with the dynamic handling packageand for AMG vehicles.Manual drive program M differs from driveprogram S (or, in the case of AMG vehicles,drive programs S and S+) with regard to:RspontaneityRresponsivenessRsmoothness of the gear changesX Press the program selector button

(Y page 145) repeatedly until M appears inthe multifunction display.

X AMG vehicles: turn the drive programselector (Y page 146) until M appears in themultifunction display.The indicator M on the drive program selec-tor lights up in red.

Upshifting

i Vehicles with the dynamic handling package: if the maximum engine speed forthe shift range is reached and you continueto accelerate, the automatic transmissionshifts up. If manual drive program M hasbeen selected, the automatic transmissiondoes not switch up.

X Briefly press the selector lever to the righttowards D+.

orX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter (Y page 146).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.

AMG vehicles

! In manual drive program M, the automatictransmission does not shift up automati-cally even when the engine limiting speedfor the current gear is reached. When theengine limiting speed is reached, the fuelsupply is cut to prevent the engine fromoverrevving. Always make sure that theengine speed does not reach the red area ofthe tachometer. There is otherwise a risk ofengine damage.

Before the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator appears in the multifunc-tion display.

: Gear indicator; Upshift indicator

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.X If corresponding gearshift recommenda-

tion : appears in the multifunction displayon the instrument cluster, pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter(Y page 146).The automatic transmission shifts to rec-ommended gear ;.

148 Automatic transmissionDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

DownshiftingX Briefly press the selector lever to the left

towards D–.orX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter (Y page 146).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

i If you brake the vehicle or stop withoutshifting down, the automatic transmissionwill shift down to a gear that will allow thevehicle to accelerate or pull away again.

i Vehicles with the dynamic handling package: to avoid overrevving the enginewhen downshifting, the automatic trans-mission does not shift to a lower gear if thiswould result in the maximum engine speedbeing exceeded.

i For maximum acceleration, push theselector lever to the left or pull the left-handsteering wheel paddle shifter until thetransmission selects the optimum gear forthe current speed.

Kickdown

i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to usekickdown in manual drive program M.

You can also use kickdown for maximumacceleration in manual drive program M.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

i During kickdown, you cannot shift gearsusing the steering wheel paddle shifters orthe selector lever.

Switching off the manual drive programX Vehicles with the dynamic handling

package: press the program selector but-

ton (Y page 145). M is no longer shown inthe multifunction display.

X AMG vehicles: turn the drive programselector (Y page 146) until C, S or S+appears in the multifunction display.

Automatic transmission 149

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-

shop immediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.

If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

Releasing the parking lock manuallyIn the event of an electrical malfunction, it ispossible to release the selector lever lockmanually to move it out of position P. This isthe case, for example, if you wish to tow thevehicle away.

! Do not use any sharp-edged objects toremove the selector lever gaiter from thecenter console. This could damage theselector lever gaiter.

X Apply the parking brake.X Pry off selector lever gaiter : with a flat,

blunt object (e.g. a screwdriver wrapped in

cloth) from the right-hand edge. Pull selec-tor lever gaiter : up and out.

X Press release button ; down and simul-taneously move the selector lever out ofposition P.The selector lever can now be moved freelyuntil it is returned to position P.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.

150 RefuelingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediately

using soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,

immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-

tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

Do not get into the vehicle again during therefueling process. Otherwise, electrostaticcharge could build up again.If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could sprayout when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 343).For further information on fuel and fuel qual-ity, see the separate operating instructions.

Refueling

Opening the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tire pressure table? Fuel type to be usedX Switch the engine off.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door.

This corresponds to SmartKey position 0:"SmartKey removed".The driver’s door can be closed again.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow :.The fuel filler flap opens slightly.

X Open the fuel filler flap fully.X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise

and remove it.X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder

bracket on the inside of fuel filler flap ;.

Refueling 151

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in placeand refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.

i Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise,fuel may leak out.

Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn

clockwise until it engages audibly.X Close the fuel filler flap.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle.

i If you are driving with the fuel filler capopen, the 8 reserve fuel warning lampflashes. A message appears in the multi-function display (Y page 224).In addition, the ; Check Engine warninglamp may light up (Y page 242).For further information on warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see(Y page 242).

152 RefuelingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

G WARNINGRisk of explosion or fire.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 immediately and remove it

(Y page 135).X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap can-not be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 74).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 76).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-med.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigs may ignite if they come into contact withhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of the

parking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicleor its drivetrain could be damaged.

Parking 153

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmission must be in position P and

the SmartKey must be removed from theignition lock.Rthe front wheels must be turned towards

the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradi-ents.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral position N when you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Apply the parking brake firmly.X Shift the transmission to position P.

Using the SmartKeyX Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-

tion lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

i The SmartKey can only be removed if thetransmission is in position P.

Using KEYLESS-GOX Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 136).

The engine stops and all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster go out.

i When the driver's door is closed, this cor-responds to key position 1. When the driv-er's door is open, this corresponds to keyposition 0: "Key removed".

If you try to switch off the engine when thetransmission is not in position P, a messageappears in the multifunction display. A signalsounds.

Parking brake

G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-cle when the service brake is faulty. Do notapply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of the

parking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

If you brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the brake lamps will not light up.

154 ParkingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly.When the engine is running, the $ (USAonly) or J (Canada only) indicator lamplights up in the instrument cluster.

X To release: depress the brake pedal andkeep it depressed.

X Pull release handle :.When the ignition is switched on or theengine is running, the $ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) indicator lamp goes outin the instrument cluster.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and

seek advice.

i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

Driving tips

General driving tips

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted from

traffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the coun-try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic-tions prohibit the driver from using a mobilephone while driving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-free mode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle coversa distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) persecond.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to the

recommended tire pressure.X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof racks when they are not nee-

ded.X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out as

indicated by the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or by the serviceinterval display.

Fuel consumption also increases when driv-ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and inhilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.

Driving tips 155

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent is greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance withthe manufacturer's specifications. For thisreason, all work on the engine must be carriedout by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO displayThe ECO display provides feedback on howeconomical your driving characteristics are.The ECO display assists you in achieving themost economical driving style for the selec-ted settings and prevailing conditions. Yourdriving style can significantly influence thevehicle's consumption.

Example: ECO display

The ECO display consists of three bars:RAccelerationRConstantRCoastingThe percent value is the average value of thethree bars. The three bars and the mean valuebegin at the value of 50%. A higher percent-age indicates a more economical drivingstyle.The ECO display does not indicate the actualfuel consumption. A fixed percentage countin the ECO display does not indicate a fixedconsumption.Apart from driving style, consumption isdependent on many factors such as, e.g.:RloadRtire pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRelectrical consumers switched onThese factors are not included in the ECO dis-play.The evaluation of your driving style is carriedout using the following three categories:

156 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

RAcceleration (evaluation of all accelera-tion processes):- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,

especially at higher speeds- The bar empties: sporty accelerationRConstant (assessment of driving behavior

at all times):- The bar fills up: constant speed and

avoidance of unnecessary accelerationand deceleration

- The bar empties: fluctuations in speedRCoasting (assessment of all deceleration

processes):- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,

keeping your distance and early releaseof the accelerator. The vehicle can coastwithout use of the brakes.

- The bar empties: frequent braking

i An economical driving style speciallyrequires driving at moderate enginespeeds.To achieve a higher value in the categoriesAcceleration and Constant:Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive in drive program E.

i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.on the highway, only the bar for Constantwill change.

i The ECO display summarizes the drivingcharacteristics from the start of the journeyto its completion. For this reason, the barschange dynamically at the beginning of thejourney. On longer journeys, there arefewer changes. For more dynamic changes,carry out a manual reset.

For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 196).

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients

! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shiftingearly to a lower gear. This allows you to takeadvantage of the engine braking effect andhelps avoid overheating and excessivewear of the brakes.When you take advantage of the enginebraking effect, a drive wheel may not turnfor some time, e.g. on a slippery road sur-face. This could cause damage to the drivetrain. This type of damage is not covered bythe Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately.Drive on for a short while. This allows the air-flow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Driving tips 157

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayed reac-tion from the brakes when braking for the firsttime. This may also occur after the vehicle hasbeen washed.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten-tion to the traffic conditions. This will warm upthe brake discs, thereby drying them morequickly and protecting them against corro-sion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.RBrake occasionally to remove any possible

salt residue. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the

beginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle

ahead.

Servicing the brakes

! If the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster and you hear a warn-ing tone while the engine is running, thebrake fluid level may be too low. Observeadditional warning messages in the multi-function display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checked immedi-ately. This work should be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at a quali-

fied specialist workshop. Consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop to arrange this.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-formance tests may only be carried out ona 2-axle dynamometer. If you are planningto have the vehicle tested on such a dyna-mometer, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to obtain further informationfirst. Otherwise, you could damage thedrive train or the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP® sys-tem operates automatically, the engine andthe ignition must be switched off (Smart-Key in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock orStart/Stop button in position 0 or 1) whilethe parking brake is being tested on a brakedynamometer.Braking maneuvers triggered automaticallyby ESP® may seriously damage the brakesystem.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP® sys-tem operates automatically, the engine andthe ignition system must be switched off(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignitionlock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1)when:Rtesting the parking brake on a brake

dynamometer.Ryou intend to have the vehicle towed with

the front axle raised.Braking maneuvers triggered automaticallyby ESP® may seriously damage the brakesystem.

If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test the function-ality of your brakes at regular intervals. To doso, press firmly on the brake pedal when driv-ing at a high speed. This improves the grip ofthe brake pads.You can find a description of Brake Assist(BAS) on (Y page 64) or of BAS PLUS on(Y page 65).

158 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyhave brake pads/linings installed on yourvehicle which have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspondto an equivalent quality standard. Brakepads/linings which have not been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are notof an equivalent quality could affect your vehi-cle's operating safety.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse brake fluid that has been speciallyapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,or which corresponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake fluid which has not beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich is not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.

High-performance brake system forAMG vehiclesThe high-performance brake system is instal-led only on the C 63 AMG.The high-performance brake system isdesigned for heavy loads. This may lead tonoise when braking. This will depend on:RSpeedRBraking forceREnvironmental conditions, such as temper-

ature and humidityThe wear and tear on individual brake systemcomponents, e.g. brake pads/linings ordiscs, depends on:Rthe individual driving styleRthe operating conditionsFor this reason, it is impossible to state amileage that will be valid under all circum-stances. An aggressive driving style will leadto high wear. You can obtain further informa-tion about this from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after sev-eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-sate for this by applying greater force to thebrake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt

your driving and braking accordingly duringthis break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results in corre-spondingly high brake wear. Observe thebrake wear warning lamp in the instrumentcluster and note any brake status messagesin the multifunction display. Especially forhigh performance driving, it is important tomaintain and have the brake system checkedregularly.

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Ravoid sudden steering movements.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads

! Do not drive through flooded areas.Check the depth of any water before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electronic compo-nents in the engine or the automatic trans-mission. Water can also be drawn in by theengine's air suction nozzles and this cancause engine damage.

Driving tips 159

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Winter driving

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali-fied specialist workshop at the onset of win-ter.Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruisecontrol or DISTRONIC PLUS.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freez-ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Thevehicle could skid if you fail to adapt yourdriving style. Always adapt your driving style

and drive at a speed to suit the prevailingweather conditions.You should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 305).For more information on driving with summertires, see (Y page 304).Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 304).

Driving systems

Cruise control

Important safety notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. On long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden, you must select shift range 1,2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will makeuse of the braking effect of the engine. Thisrelieves the load on the brake system andprevents the brakes from overheating andwearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of an acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruisecontrol cannot take into account the road,traffic and weather conditions. Cruise controlis only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,for braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.

160 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do not

allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-

erating could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,

heavy rain or snowIf there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

i The speed indicated in the speedometermay differ slightly from the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate cruise control? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction displayfor five seconds. In the multifunction display,the segments between the stored speed andthe maximum speed light up.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeedYou can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).

X Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control lever up :or down ;.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling upthe last stored speed

G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou ?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.

Driving systems 161

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

X Press the cruise control lever up : for ahigher speed or down ; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up : ordown ; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up : or down ; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up : ordown ; beyond the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up : or down ; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. For exam-ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speedto the last speed stored after you have fin-ished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-

wards =.orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou depress the parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20 mph

(30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®

Ryou shift the transmission to position Nwhile driving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐trol Off message in the multifunction dis-play for approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

Important safety notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain the dis-tance to the vehicle detected in front.DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically sothat the set speed is not exceeded.On long and steep downhill gradients, espe-cially if the vehicle is laden, you must selectshift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so,you will make use of the braking effect of theengine. This relieves the load on the brakesystem and prevents the brakes from over-heating and wearing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-movingvehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in orderto maintain the preset distance to the vehiclein front.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-

ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-tify other road users and complex traffic sit-uations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and then

brake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.

162 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 40% of the maximum braking force. If thisbraking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUSwarns you visually and audibly. There is a riskof an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the riskof accident nor override the laws of physics.DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do not

allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-

erating could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,

heavy rain or snowDISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line.

In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for

example, in parking garagesIf DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi-cle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpect-edly accelerate the vehicle to the storedspeed.This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane

or an exit laneRbe so high when driving in the right-hand

lane that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand laneRbe so high when driving in the left-hand lane

that you overtake vehicles in the right-handlane

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol in the speed range between 20 mph(Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front ofyou, it operates in the speed range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, itcan resemble the radar detectors of theresponsible authorities. You can refer to therelevant chapter in the Operator's Manual ifquestions are asked about this.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void any

Driving systems 163

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

warranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Cruise control lever

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; To store the current speed or a lowerspeed

= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To store the current speed or call up the

last stored speedA To set the specified minimum distance

Switching on DISTRONIC PLUS, storingand maintaining the current speed

Activation conditionsIn order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-lowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take up

to two minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe parking brake must be released.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe hood must be closed.Rthe driver's door must be closed when you

shift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door must be closed.Rthe vehicle must not skid.

Activating while drivingWhen driving at speeds below 20 mph(30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONICPLUS if the vehicle in front has been detectedand is shown in the multifunction display. Ifthe vehicle in front is no longer detected anddisplayed, DISTRONIC PLUS switches off anda tone sounds.X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ?, or press it up : or down ;.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X Press the cruise control lever repeatedlyup : or down ; until the desired speed isset.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Overridemessage appears in the multifunction dis-play. The set distance to a slower-movingvehicle in front will then not be maintained.You will be driving at the speed you deter-

164 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

mine by the position of the acceleratorpedal.

Pulling awayX If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove

your foot from the brake pedal.X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ?.orX Accelerate briefly.

Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front.

DrivingIf there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle.In this way, the distance you have selected ismaintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is driving faster, it accelerates your vehi-cle, but only up to the speed you have stored.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph

(60 km/h)RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis-

tance to a vehicle in frontRyou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger

of collisionIf these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interruptedif changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-tance between your vehicle and the vehicle infront becomes too small.

i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand drivevehicles and the right lane on right-handdrive vehicles.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated

with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-

partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,

e.g. by a vehicle occupant.There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 168).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until itis stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake.

i Depending on the specified minimum dis-tance, your vehicle will come to a standstillat a sufficient distance behind the vehicle infront. The specified minimum distance isset using the control on the cruise controllever.

You will see a warning message in the multi-function display if DISTRONIC PLUS is acti-vated and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's

seat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-

matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.Rthe hood is opened.Select Park (P)

Driving systems 165

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

X Shift the transmission to position P to pre-vent the vehicle from rolling away.DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. The warn-ing message in the multifunction displaydisappears.

The horn will also sound at regular intervals ifDISTRONIC PLUS is activated and you:Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's

door and remove your seat belt.Ropen the hood.The sounding of the horn alerts you to the factthat the vehicle has been parked whileDISTRONIC PLUS is still activated. The soundbecomes louder if you attempt to lock thevehicle. The vehicle is not locked untilDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

i If the engine has been switched off, itcannot be started again until DISTRONICPLUS has been deactivated.

If DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and a mal-function occurs in the system or if there is adisruption in the voltage supply, the Brake Immediately message is shown in the mul-tifunction display. Depress the brake firmlyimmediately until the warning message dis-appears from the multifunction display orshift the transmission to position P.DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

Setting a speedX Press the cruise control lever up : for a

higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-

ments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up : ordown ; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up : or down ; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): briefly

press the cruise control lever up : ordown ; beyond the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up : or down ;, the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-erate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUSadjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished over-taking.

Storing the current speed or calling up astored speedX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ?.X Remove your foot from the accelerator

pedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed isstored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.

Setting the specified minimum distanceYou can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 167).

i Make sure that you maintain a sufficientdistance to the vehicle in front and complywith the minimum distance as required bylaw. Adjust the distance to the vehicle infront if necessary.

166 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

X To increase: turn control ; in direction=.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control ; in direc-tion :.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speed-ometer

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one ortwo segments ; in the set speed range lightup.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments ; between speed of the vehicle infront : and stored speed = light up.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the multi-function display

General notesIn the Assistance menu (Y page 200) of theon-board computer, you can select the assis-tance display.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vatedX Select the Assist. Graphic function

using the on-board computer(Y page 201).

When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, youwill see the following in the multifunction dis-play:

Example: vehicles with automatic transmission: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable? Own vehicle

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-tedX Select the Assist. Graphic function

using the on-board computer(Y page 201).

You will see the stored speed for about fiveseconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.After this time, you will see the following inthe multifunction display while DISTRONICPLUS is activated:

Driving systems 167

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Example: vehicles with automatic transmission: Vehicle in front, if detected; Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable= Own vehicle? DISTRONIC PLUS activated

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-

wards :.orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, youwill see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message inthe multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-ted if:Ryou engage the parking brakeRyou are driving slower than 15 mph

(25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front,or if the vehicle in front is no longer detec-tedRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®

Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towards

you in order to pull away and the front-passenger door is openRthe vehicle has skiddedIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see theDISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multi-function display for approximately five sec-onds.If the vehicle has been stopped by DISTRONICPLUS and a malfunction occurs in the system,the Brake Immediately message appears inthe multifunction display. Depress the brakepedal immediately so that the vehicle doesnot roll away. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deac-tivated, and the message disappears.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesThe following contains descriptions of certainroad and traffic conditions in which you mustbe particularly attentive. In such situations,brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is thendeactivated.

168 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-cles when cornering is limited. Your vehiclemay brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehiclestraveling on a different line. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehiclewill be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the road,because of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, thedetected vehicle turns a corner and revealsan obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONICPLUS will not brake for these.

Driving systems 169

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detectvehicles that are crossing your lane. Activat-ing DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights withcrossing traffic, for example, could causeyour vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

Dynamic handling package withsports mode

General notesThe most important part of the dynamic han-dling package with sports mode is the adjust-able damping system. This automatically con-trols and adapts the suspension to therespective driving situation.The calibration of the suspension dependson:Ryour driving styleRthe road surface conditionsRyour individual selection; see the following

descriptionThe dynamic handling package with sportsmode also includes steering wheel paddleshifters (Y page 146) with a manual drive pro-gram (Y page 148).

Example: position of dynamic handling packagewith sports mode buttonX Start the engine.

Sports tuningThe firmer setting of the suspension tuning insports mode ensures even better contactwith the road. Select this mode when employ-ing a sporty driving style, e.g. on windingcountry roads.Your selection remains stored until youswitch off the engine.X Press button ;.

Indicator lamp : lights up. Sports suspen-sion tuning is selected. Depending on theengine output, the accelerator pedal ismore responsive. On vehicles with auto-matic transmission, drive program S isselected.

Comfort tuningIn comfort mode, the driving characteristicsof your vehicle are more comfortable. There-fore, select this mode if you favor a morecomfortable driving style. Select comfortmode also when driving fast on straight roads,e.g. on straight stretches of freeway.X Press button ;.

Indicator lamp : goes out. Comfortablesuspension tuning is selected. On vehicleswith automatic transmission, drive pro-gram E is selected.

170 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep

slopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by

pressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-

partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Deactivating the HOLD function(Y page 171).

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has been auto-

matically switched off by the ECO start/stop functionRthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt

is fastenedRthe parking brake is releasedRthe hood is closed.Rthe transmission is in position D, R or NRDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

Activating the HOLD functionX Make sure that the activation conditions

are met.X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal further

until ë appears in the multifunction dis-play.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated automati-cally if:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in

position D or R.Rthe transmission is in position P.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a

certain amount of pressure until ë dis-appears from the multifunction display.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.You will see a warning message in the multi-function display if the HOLD function is acti-vated and:

Driving systems 171

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Rthe driver's door is open and the driver'sseat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-

matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.Rthe hood is opened.Shift to 'P'X Shift the transmission to position P to pre-

vent the vehicle from rolling away.The HOLD function is deactivated. Thewarning message in the multifunction dis-play disappears.

The horn will also sound at regular intervals ifthe HOLD function is activated and you:Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's

door and remove your seat belt.Ropen the hood.The sounding of the horn alerts you to the factthat the vehicle has been parked while theHOLD function is still activated. If you attemptto lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.The vehicle is not locked until the HOLD func-tion is deactivated.

i If the engine has been switched off, itcannot be started again until the HOLDfunction has been deactivated.

If there is a malfunction in the system orpower supply while the HOLD function is acti-vated, the Brake Immediately message isshown in the multifunction display. Immedi-ately depress the brake firmly until the warn-ing message in the multifunction display goesout.You can also shift the transmission to positionP. This deactivates the HOLD function.

RACE START

Important safety notes

i Observe the safety notes for the SPORThandling mode (Y page 68).

RACE START is intended solely for activationon dedicated race circuits. Always adapt your

speed and driving style to the prevailing roadand weather conditions.RACE START enables optimal accelerationfrom a standing start. The precondition forthis is a suitable high-grip road surface.

i RACE START is only available in AMG vehi-cles.

Conditions for activationYou can activate RACE START if:Rthe doors are closedRthe engine is running and it has reached an

operating temperature of approximately176 ‡ (80 †) This is the case when theengine oil temperature in the multifunctiondisplay stops flashing.RSPORT handling mode is activated

(Y page 68)Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead

positionRthe vehicle is stationary and the brake

pedal is depressed (left foot)Rthe transmission is in position D

Activating RACE STARTX Depress the brake pedal with your left foot

and keep it depressed.X Turn the drive program selector clockwise

(Y page 145) until the RS lamp lights up.The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appearsin the multifunction display.

i If the activation conditions are no longerfulfilled, RACE START is canceled. The mul-tifunction display shows the RACE START Canceled message.

172 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel pad-dle shifter (Y page 146).

orX To confirm: pull the right steering wheel

paddle shifter (Y page 146).The RACE START Available Depress gas pedal message appears in the multi-function display.

i If you do not depress the acceleratorpedal fully within two seconds, RACESTART is canceled. The RACE START Not Possible See Operator's Manual mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.The engine speed rises to approximately3,500 rpm.The RACE START Release brake to start message appears in the multifunc-tion display.

i If you do not release the brake pedalwithin five seconds, RACE START is can-celed. The multifunction display shows theRACE START Canceled message.

X Take your foot off the brake, but keep theaccelerator pedal depressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximum accel-eration.The RACE START Active message appearsin the multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehiclereaches a speed of approximately 30 mph(Canada: 50 km/h). Drive program S+ is acti-vated. SPORT handling mode remains activa-ted.RACE START is deactivated immediately ifyou release the accelerator pedal duringRACE START or if any of the activation condi-tions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Possible See Operator's Manualmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

i If RACE START is used repeatedly within ashort period of time, it is only availableagain after the vehicle has been driven acertain distance.

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per-manently driven. Together with ESP®, itimproves the traction of your vehicle when-ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficientgrip.If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATICcan neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannottake account of road, weather and traffic con-ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as

necessary when pulling away.RAccelerate less when driving.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axleraised. This may damage the transfer case.Damage of this sort is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Allwheels must remain either on the ground orbe fully raised. Observe the instructions fortowing the vehicle with all wheels in fullcontact with the ground.

i In wintry driving conditions, the maximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved ifyou use winter tires (M+S tires), with snowchains if necessary.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It monitors the areaaround your vehicle using six sensors in thefront bumper and four sensors in the rearbumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediatesurroundings. You are always responsible for

Driving systems 173

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park-ing space. When maneuvering, parking orpulling out of a parking space, make sure thatthere are no persons, animals or objects inthe area in which you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectswhen they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.The sensors may not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONIC may not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-handside (example)

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-sideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-

mals or objectsRabove the detection range, e.g. overhang-

ing loads, truck overhangs or loading rampsThe sensors must be free from dirt, ice orslush. They can otherwise not function cor-rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 281).

Side view

Top view

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)

174 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx.20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx.15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and a warn-ing tone sounds. If the distance falls belowthe minimum, the distance may no longer beshown.

Warning displaysThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the center air vents.The warning display for the rear area is loca-ted on the headliner in the rear compartment.

Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the

vehicle; Segments on the right-hand side of the

vehicle= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning display for each side of the vehi-cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-

ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellowsegments showing operational readiness =light up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-mine which warning display is active when theengine is running.

Transmission position

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicleis rolling back-wards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an

intermittent warning tone for approx-imately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a

warning tone for approximately two sec-onds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

Driving systems 175

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Parking Guidance is also deacti-vated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lock.

176 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after approx-imately 20 seconds,and the indicator lampin the PARKTRONICbutton lights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified

specialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after approx-imately 20 seconds.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 281).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Parking Guidance

Important safety notesParking Guidance is an electronic parking aidwith ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to meas-ure the road on both sides of the vehicle. Asuitable parking space is indicated by theparking symbol. You receive steering instruc-tions when parking. You may also usePARKTRONIC (Y page 173).Parking Guidance is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your imme-diate surroundings. You are always responsi-ble for safe maneuvering, parking and exitinga parking space. When maneuvering, parkingor pulling out of a parking space, make surethat there are no persons, animals or objectsin the area in which you are maneuvering.

G WARNINGIf objects are located above the detectionrange, Parking Guidance may provide steeringinstructions too soon. You may cause a colli-sion as a result. There is a risk of an accident.If objects are located above the detectionrange, stop and switch off Parking Assist.

! Pay particular attention to low objects orobjects with flat surfaces, such as trailerdrawbars, posts, cross beams and curbs.These types of objects cannot be detectedby Parking Guidance and may damage thevehicle.

When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, ParkingGuidance is also unavailable.

Driving systems 177

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, i.e.

not on the pavement, for example. ParkingGuidance may not detect flat curbs

Parking Guidance may also display spacesnot suitable for parking, e.g.:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfacesParking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park-

ing space as possible.RParking spaces that are littered, overgrown

or partially occupied by trailer drawbarsmight be identified incorrectly or not at all.RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking

space being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC

(Y page 175) warning messages during theparking procedure.RWhen transporting a load which protrudes

from your vehicle, you must not use ParkingGuidance.RNever use Parking Guidance with snow

chains or an emergency spare wheel moun-ted.RMake sure that the tire pressures are

always correct. This has a direct effect onthe steering instructions.RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the

parking space after parking is dependenton various factors. These include the posi-tion and shape of the vehicles parked infront and behind it and the conditions of thelocation. In some cases, Parking Guidancemay guide you too far or not far enough intoa parking space. In some cases, it may alsolead you across or onto the curb. If neces-sary, cancel the parking procedure withParking Guidance.

! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a

sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels or tires.

Detecting parking spaces

: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the rightParking Guidance is automatically activatedwhen you drive forwards. The system isoperational at speeds of up to approximately22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, thesystem independently locates and measuresparking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; asa status indicator in the instrument cluster.When a parking space has been detected, anarrow towards the right = or the left : alsoappears. Parking Guidance only displaysparking spaces on the front-passenger sideas standard. Parking spaces on the driver'sside are displayed as soon as the turn signalon the driver's side is activated. To park onthe driver's side, you must leave the driver'sside turn signal switched on until you haveengaged reverse gear.Parking Guidance will only detect parkingspaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are at least 5 ft (1.5 m) wideRthat are at least 4.3 ft (1.3 m) longer than

your vehicleA parking space is displayed while you aredriving past it, and until you are approx-imately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

178 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

ParkingX Stop the vehicle when the parking space

symbol shows the desired parking space inthe instrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The multifunction display shows theCheck Vehicle Surroundings Press 'OK' to confirm message.

X Press the a button on the multifunctionsteering wheel to confirm.The multifunction display switches to Park-ing Guidance.Depending on your distance from the park-ing space, the Please Drive Backwardmessage will appear in the multifunctiondisplay.

X If necessary, reverse towards the parkingspace. This is indicated by an arrow point-ing backwards.Continue backing up until you hear a tone.Stop – the stop position has been reached.The arrow is white.The Please Steer Wheel to the Right or Please Steer Wheel to the Left message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X While the vehicle is stationary, turn thesteering wheel in the specified direction

until the arrow is white and a warning tonesounds.

X To back up into the parking space: main-tain the steering wheel angle and reversecarefully.

X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone,The vehicle has reached the position inwhich you need to countersteer.The Please Steer Wheel to the Left or Please Steer Wheel to the Rightmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

X To countersteer: while the vehicle is sta-tionary, turn the steering wheel in thespecified direction until the arrow is whiteand a warning tone sounds.

X To back up into the parking space: main-tain the steering wheel angle and reversecarefully.

X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone, atthe latest when PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone.The Parking Guidance Finished mes-sage appears in the multifunction displayand a tone sounds. You may be asked tosteer in a different direction and thenchange gear. In this case, further displaysin the multifunction display will direct youto the final position.

X Maneuver if necessary.X Always observe the warning messages dis-

played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 175).

Canceling Parking GuidanceX Press the PARKTRONIC button on the cen-

ter console (Y page 175).Parking Guidance is canceled immediatelyand PARKTRONIC is deactivated.

Parking Guidance is canceled automatically ifit is no longer possible to guide you into theparking space, or if a malfunction occurs.The parking space symbol goes out and awarning tone sounds. The Parking Guid‐

Driving systems 179

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

ance Canceled message appears in the mul-tifunction display.

Rear view camera

General notes

: Rear view cameraRear view camera : is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It shows the area behindyour vehicle in the COMAND display.The rear view camera is located in the handlestrip of the trunk lid.

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your imme-diate surroundings. You are always responsi-ble for safe maneuvering and parking. Whenmaneuvering or parking, make sure that thereare no persons, animals or objects in the areain which you are maneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will functionin a limited manner:Rif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED

lighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,

e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinter

Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedRif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this

event, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of therear view camera may be restricted due toadditional accessories on the rear of the vehi-cle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack).

View through the cameraThe area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.The rear view camera may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. The rear view camera does not showobjects in the following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the tailgate

handle

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bot-tom-most guideline.

Activating the rear view cameraX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

2 in the ignition lock.X Make sure that the rear view camera func-

tion is selected in COMAND (see the sepa-rate operating instructions for COMAND).

X Engage reverse gear.The area behind the vehicle is shown in theCOMAND display.

180 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

ATTENTION ASSIST

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to thedriver. It might not always recognize fatigueor increasing inattentiveness in time or fail torecognize them at all. The system is not asubstitute for a well-rested and attentivedriver.ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways.It is active in the range between 50 mph(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indica-tors of fatigue or increasing lapses in con-centration on the part of the driver, it sug-gests you take a break.ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level offatigue or lapses in concentration by takingthe following criteria into account:Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering

characteristicsRjourney details, e.g. time of day and length

of journeyThe functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed ornot occur at all:Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-

face is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving style

with high cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRif you are predominantly driving slower

than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than112 mph (180 km/h)Rif you are currently using COMAND or mak-

ing a telephone call with itRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as when

you change lanes or change your speed

Warning and display messages in themultifunction displayX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-

board computer (Y page 202).If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will bewarned no sooner than 20 minutes after yourjourney has begun. You then hear an inter-mittent warning tone twice and the Atten‐tion Assist: Drowsiness detected mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.X If necessary, take a break.X Press the a button to confirm the mes-

sage.On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If youdo not take a break, you will be warned againafter 15 minutes at the earliest. The precon-dition for this is that ATTENTION ASSIST stilldetects typical indicators of fatigue orincreasing lapses in concentration.ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you con-tinue your journey and starts assessing yourtiredness again if:Ryou switch off the engine.Ryou take off your seat belt and open the

driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers orto take a break.

The assistance graphic shows the é sym-bol when ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated(Y page 201).

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 181) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 183).

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemto monitor the areas on both sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from a speed of

Driving systems 181

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in the moni-tored area. If you then switch on the corre-sponding turn signal to change lanes, you willalso receive a visual and audible collisionwarning. Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in therear bumper for monitoring purposes.For Blind Spot Assist to assist you, the radarsensor system must be operational.

Important safety notesBlind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving. Always ensure that there issufficient distance to the side for other roadusers and obstacles.

G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,

placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speed

differential and overtake your vehicleAs a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Monitoring range of the sensorsIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-

ing the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,

snow or sprayRnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicy-

clesRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanesRyou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or similar lane bordersVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next toyour vehicle, as shown in the diagram.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in the middle of their lane. This may bethe case if there are vehicles driving at theinner edge of their lanes.

182 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-

ing close to crash barriers or similar solidlane borders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an

extended period next to long vehicles, suchas trucks.

The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assistare integrated into the sides of the rearbumper. Make sure that the bumper is free ofdirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.The sensors must not be covered, for exam-ple by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Fol-lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam-age to the bumpers, have the function of thesensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwisenot work properly.

Indicator and warning displayBlind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampWhen Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yel-low at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). Atspeeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indica-tor lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist isoperational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corre-sponding side lights up red. This warning isalways emitted when a vehicle enters the

blind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in the monitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, vehicles detectedare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp :. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist

(Y page 202) is activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately 1.5 secondsand then turn yellow.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notesLane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle with camera :, which ismounted at the top of the windshield. LaneKeeping Assist detects lane markings on theroad and warns you before you leave yourlane unintentionally.

Driving systems 183

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

: Active Lane Keeping Assist cameraIf you select km on the on-board computer inthe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer func-tion (Y page 203), Lane Keeping Assist isactive starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If themiles display unit is selected, the assistancerange begins at 40 mph.A warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lane marking. It will warn you bymeans of intermittent vibration in the steer-ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions. LaneKeeping Assist is merely an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.

G WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. There isa risk of an accident.You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-ing Assist.

The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep thevehicle in the lane.The system may be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-

cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,

the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged

or covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-

ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-struction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark or

covered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too

small and the lane markings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.

lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the lane

Switching on Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using

the on-board computer; to do so, selectStandard or Adaptive(Y page 202).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 201) are shown in green. LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.

184 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

StandardIf Standard is selected, no warning vibrationoccurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,

the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as

ABS, BAS or ESP®.

AdaptiveWhen Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,

the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an

obstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only when nec-essary and in good time if you cross the lanemarking, the system recognizes certain con-ditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a

bend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high-

way.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Active Driving Assistance package

General notesThe Active Driving Assistance package con-sists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 162), ActiveBlind Spot Assist (Y page 185) and ActiveLane Keeping Assist (Y page 188).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notesActive Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensorsystem to monitor the side areas of your vehi-cle which are behind the driver. A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in the moni-tored area. If you then switch on the corre-sponding turn signal to change lane, you willalso receive an optical and audible warning. Ifa risk of lateral collision is detected, correc-tive braking may help you avoid a collision. Tosupport the course-correcting brake applica-tion, Active Blind Spot Assist uses theforward-facing radar sensor system. The freespace is then evaluated in the direction oftravel and to the side before a course-cor-recting brake application is initiated.Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist youwhen driving, the radar sensor system mustbe operational.

Important safety notesActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It doesnot detect all traffic situations and road usersand is no substitute for attentive driving.Always ensure that there is sufficient dis-tance to the side for other road users andobstacles.

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,

placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speed

differential and overtake your vehicleAs a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only:

Driving systems 185

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Monitoring range of the sensorsG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not detect alltraffic situations and road users. There is arisk of an accident.Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-

ing the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or

sprayVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect nar-row vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicy-cles, or may only detect them too late.

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area upto 10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directlynext to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.For this purpose, Active Blind Spot Assistuses radar sensors in the rear bumper.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in the middle of their lane. This may bethe case if there are vehicles driving at theinner edge of their lanes.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-

ing close to crash barriers or similar solidlane borders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an

extended period next to long vehicles, suchas trucks.

Two Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensorsare integrated into the front and rear bumpersrespectively. An additional radar sensor islocated behind the cover in the radiator grill.Make sure that the sensors and areas aroundthem are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rearsensors must not be covered, for example bycycle racks or overhanging cargo. Following asevere impact or in the event of damage to

186 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

the bumpers, have the function of the sensorschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not workproperly.

Indicator and warning displayActive Blind Spot Assist is not active atspeeds below approximately 20 mph(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring rangeare then not indicated.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampWhen Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lightsup yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph(30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out andActive Blind Spot Assist is operational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corre-sponding side lights up red. This warning isalways emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Active BlindSpot Assist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Visual and acoustic collision warningWhen you switch on the turn signals tochange lanes and a vehicle is detected in theside monitoring range, you receive a visualand acoustic collision warning. You then heara double warning tone and red warninglamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on,detected vehicles are indicated by the flash-ing of red warning lamp :. There are no fur-ther warning tones.

Course-correcting brake applicationG WARNINGA course-correcting brake application cannotalways prevent a collision. There is a risk of anaccident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warnsyou or makes a course-correcting brake appli-cation. Always maintain a safe distance at thesides.

In very rare cases, the system may make aninappropriate brake application. An inappro-priate brake application may be interrupted atany time if you steer slightly in the oppositedirection or accelerate.If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of alateral collision in the monitoring range, acourse-correcting brake application is carriedout. This is meant to assist you in avoiding acollision.The course-correcting brake application isavailable in the speed range between 20 mph(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).If a course-correcting brake applicationoccurs, red warning lamp : flashes in theexterior mirror and the following is shown inthe multifunction display, for example:

Driving systems 187

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Either a very slight course-correcting brakeapplication, or none at all, may occur if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash

barriers, located on both sides of your vehi-cle.Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the

side.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds.Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.RESP® is switched off.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is

detected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist

(Y page 202) is activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately 1.5 secondsand then turn yellow.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notesActive Lane Keeping Assist monitors the areain front of your vehicle by means of camera :mounted at the top of the windshield. ActiveLane Keeping Assist detects lane markings onthe road and warns you before you leave yourlane unintentionally. If you do not react to thewarning, a lane-correcting application of thebrakes can bring the vehicle back into theoriginal lane.

: Active Lane Keeping Assist cameraIf you select km on the on-board computer inthe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer func-tion (Y page 203), Active Lane Keeping Assistis activated starting at a speed of 60 km/h. Ifthe miles display unit is selected, the assis-tance range begins at 40 mph.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, ActiveLane Keeping Assist can neither reduce therisk of accident nor override the laws of phys-ics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take intoaccount the road, traffic and weather condi-tions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid.You are responsible for the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for brakingin good time and for staying in your lane.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continu-ously keep your vehicle in its lane.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist cannot alwaysclearly detect lane markings.In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assistcan:Rgive an unnecessary warning and then

make a course-correcting brake applicationto the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep within the lane, especiallyif Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-ing situation.

188 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

The system may be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-

cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,

the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged

or covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-

ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-struction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark or

covered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too

small and the lane markings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.

lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are highly variable shade conditions

on the roadwayRno vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane

and there are broken lane markings

Warning vibration in the steering wheelA warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lane marking. It will warn you bymeans of intermittent vibration in the steer-ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.In order that you are warned only when nec-essary and in good time if you cross the lanemarking, the system recognizes certain con-ditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a

bend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high-

way.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.

The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Lane-correcting brake applicationG WARNINGA lane-correcting brake application cannotalways bring the vehicle back into the originallane. There is a risk of an accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warnsyou or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-cation.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist does not detecttraffic conditions or road users. In very rarecases, the system may make an inappropriatebrake application, e.g. after intentionally driv-ing over a solid lane marking. There is a risk ofan accident.An inappropriate brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you steer slightly inthe opposite direction. Always make sure thatthere is sufficient distance on the side forother traffic or obstacles.

If you leave your lane, under certain circum-stances the vehicle will brake briefly on oneside. This is meant to assist you in bringingthe vehicle back to the original lane.This function is available in the range between40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and200 km/h).A lane-correcting brake application can onlybe made after driving over a solid, recogniz-able lane marking. Before this, a warningmust be given by means of intermittent vibra-tion in the steering wheel. In addition, a lanewith lane markings on both sides must berecognized. The brake application alsoslightly reduces vehicle speed.If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,the following, for example, appears in themultifunction display:

Driving systems 189

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

i A further lane-correcting brake applica-tion can only occur after your vehicle hasreturned to the original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occursif:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or

accelerate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ryou have switched on the turn signals.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds or high rates ofacceleration.RESP® is switched off.Rthe transmission is not in position D.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has

been detected and displayed.Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detecttraffic situations or road users. An inappro-priate brake application may be interrupted atany time if you:Rsteer slightly in the opposite directionRyou have switched on the turn signalsRclearly brake or accelerateA lane-correcting brake application is inter-rupted automatically if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.

Switching on Active Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using

the on-board computer; to do so, selectStandard or Adaptive (Y page 202).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 201) are shown in green. LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.If Standard is selected, no warning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In

this event, the warnings are suppressedfor a certain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such

as ABS, BAS or ESP®.When Adaptive is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In

this event, the warnings are suppressedfor a certain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an

obstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

190 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Useful information ............................ 192Important safety notes ..................... 192Displays and operation ..................... 192Menus and submenus ...................... 195Display messages ............................. 210Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 234

191

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

The on-board computer only shows messagesor warnings from certain systems in the mul-tifunction display. You should therefore make

sure your vehicle is operating safely at alltimes.If the operating safety of your vehicle isimpaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to doso. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.For an overview, see the instrument panelillustration (Y page 31).

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lightingThe lighting in the instrument cluster, in thedisplays and the controls in the vehicle inte-rior can be adjusted using the brightness con-trol knob.The brightness control knob is located on thebottom left of the instrument cluster(Y page 31).X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise

or counter-clockwise.If the light switch is set to Ã, T orL, the brightness is dependent uponthe brightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness ofthe multifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not illuminated.

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

The coolant temperature gauge is in theinstrument cluster on the left-hand side.

192 Displays and operationOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolant tem-perature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. Theengine will otherwise be damaged.

TachometerThe red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.

! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.Bear in mind that the outside temperaturedisplay indicates the temperature measuredand does not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in the mul-tifunction display (Y page 194).Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 160):

The segments light up from the storedspeed to the maximum speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 162):

One or two segments in the set speedrange light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front

that is driving at a slower speed than thestored speed:The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed lightup.

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display; Switches on the Voice Control System

(see the separate operating instructions)= Right control panel? Left control panelA Back buttonX To activate the on-board computer: turn

the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignitionlock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

Displays and operation 193

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the Audio menu: selects a

stored station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:

switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephonenumber

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the Audio menu: selects the

previous/next station or selectsan audio track or a video sceneusing rapid scrollingRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:

starts rapid scrolling of thephone book if it is open

a RConfirms a selection/displaymessageRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:

switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumberRIn the Audio menu: stops the

station search function at thedesired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits phone book/redial mem-

ory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

Back button

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off the Voice Control

System (see the separate oper-ating instructions)RHides display messages/calls

up the last Trip menu functionusedRExits the telephone book/redial

memory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display in

the Trip menu

Multifunction display

: Text field; Menu bar= Drive program? Permanent display: outside temperature

or speed (Y page 203)A Transmission positionX To display menu bar ;: press the =

or ; button on the steering wheel.Menu bar ; disappears after a few sec-onds.

194 Displays and operationOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Text field : shows the selected menu orsubmenu as well as display messages.

i You can set the time using the Audio sys-tem or COMAND (see the separate operat-ing instructions).

The following messages may appear in themultifunction display:Z Gearshift recommendation when

shifting manually (Y page 148)XjY Parking Guidance (Y page 177)CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 160)_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist

(Y page 114)¤ ECO start/stop function

(Y page 138)ë HOLD function (Y page 171)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewOperating the on-board computer(Y page 193).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTrip menu (Y page 195)RNavi menu (navigation instructions)

(Y page 197)RAudio menu (Y page 198)RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 199)RDriveAssist menu (assistance)

(Y page 200)RServ. menu (Y page 202)RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 203)RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 206)The Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightlyin vehicles with an audio system and in vehi-cles with COMAND. The examples given inthis Operator's Manual apply to vehiclesequipped with COMAND.

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the % button on thesteering wheel until the Trip menu withtrip odometer : and odometer ; isshown.

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

Example: trip computer "From Start": Distance; Driving time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectFrom Start or From Reset.

The values in the From Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey,whereas the values in the From Reset sub-menu are calculated from the last time thesubmenu was reset (Y page 196).The From Start trip computer is automati-cally reset if:Rthe ignition has been switched off for more

than four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.

Menus and submenus 195

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

The From Reset trip computer is automati-cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or99,999 miles.

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

For AMG vehicles, only the approximaterange will be displayed.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press the 9 or : button to select the

current fuel consumption and approximaterange.

The approximate range that can be covereddepends on the fuel level and your currentdriving style. If there is only a small amount offuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows avehicle being refueled C instead of therange.

ECO display

Example: ECO displayX Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectECO DISPLAY.

If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will be auto-matically reset.For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 156).

Digital speedometer

X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the 9 or : button to select thedigital speedometer.A gearshift recommendation Z can also bedisplayed.Observe the information on gearshift rec-ommendation Z when shifting manually(Y page 148).AMG vehicles: a gearshift recommendationappears in the status area of the multifunc-tion display and not in the display of thedigital speedometer.

Resetting values

Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press the 9 or : button to select the

function that you wish to reset.X Press the a button.X Press the : button to select Yes and

press the a button to confirm.You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO display

196 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

i If you reset the values in the ECO display,the values in the "From start" trip computerare also reset. If you reset the values in the"From start" trip computer, the values inthe ECO display are also reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the Navi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions. You can findfurther information in the separate operatinginstructions.X Switch on the audio system with Becker®

MAP PILOT or COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Navi menu.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current road? "Follow the road's course" symbol

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is announced, youwill see symbol = for the change of directionand distance graphic ;. The distance indi-cator shortens towards the top of the displayas you approach the point of the announcedchange of direction.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Lanes not recommended? Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of directionA Change-of-direction symbolOn multilane roads, lane recommendationscan be displayed for the next change of direc-tion if the digital map supports this data. Dur-ing the change of direction, new lanes may beadded.Lane not recommended =: you will not beable to complete the next change of directionif you stay in this lane.

Menus and submenus 197

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Recommended lane and new lane during achange of direction ?: in this lane you will beable to complete the next two changes ofdirection without changing lane.Recommended lane A: in this lane you willonly be able to complete the next change ofdirection without changing lane.

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion systemThe navigation system displays additionalinformation and the vehicle status.Possible displays:RNew Route... or Calculating Route

A new route is calculated.ROff Map or Off Mapped Road

The vehicle position is outside of the rangeof the digital map (off-map position).RNo Route

No route could be calculated to the selec-ted destination.RO:

You have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Frequency range; Station frequency with memory position

i Station ; is displayed with the stationfrequency or station name. The memoryposition is only displayed along with sta-tion ; if this has been stored.

X Switch on the audio system or COMANDand select Radio (see the separate operat-ing instructions).

X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select a stored station: briefly pressthe 9 or : button.

X To select a station from the station list:press and briefly hold the 9 or :button.

If no station list is received:X To select a station using the station

search: press and briefly hold the 9or : button.

i Switching frequency range and storingstations (see the separate operatinginstructions).

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.You can find further information on operat-ing the satellite radio in the separate oper-ating instructions.

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

Example: CD/DVD changer display: Current titleAudio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on the equip-ment installed in the vehicle.X Switch on the audio system or COMAND

and select the audio device or medium (seethe separate operating instructions).

X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Audio menu.

198 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

X To select the next/previous track:briefly press the 9 or : button.

X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9or : button until desired track has beenreached.

If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapidscrolling speed is increased. Not all audiodrives or data carriers support this function.If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and name of the track.

Video DVD operation

Example: CD/DVD changer display: Current sceneOnly on vehicles with COMAND can you oper-ate DVD videos using the Audio menu.X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD

(see the separate operating instructions).X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Audio menu.X To select the next/previous scene:

briefly press the 9 or : button.X To select a scene from the scene list

(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9or : button until desired scene hasbeen reached.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted from

traffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone (see the sep-

arate manufacturer's operating instruc-tions).

X Switch on the audio system or COMAND(see the separate operating instructions).

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to theaudio system or COMAND (see the sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Tel menu.

You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READY or the name of the network

provider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RPhone No Service: there is no network

available or the mobile phone is searchingfor a network.

Accepting a callIf someone calls you when you are in the Telmenu, a display message appears in the mul-tifunction display, for example:

Example: incoming callX Press the 6 button on the steering

wheel to accept an incoming call.

Menus and submenus 199

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

You can accept a call even if you are not in theTel menu.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press the ~ button on the steering

wheel.You can end or reject a call even if you are notin the Tel menu.

Dialing an entry from the phone bookX Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Tel menu.X Press the 9, : or a button to

switch to the phone book.X Authorize access to the phone book on the

phone.X Press the 9 or : button to select the

desired name.orX To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold

the 9 or : button for longer thanone second.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for a

particular name: press the 6 or abutton to display the numbers.

X Press the 9 or : button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-ing.

orX To exit the telephone book: press the~ or % button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.

X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Tel menu.

X Press the 6 button to switch to theredial memory.

X Press the 9 or : button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-ing.

orX If you do not want to make a call: press

the ~ or % button.

Assistance menu

Introduction

Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theDriveAssist menu:RDisplaying the assistance graphic

(Y page 201)RActivating/deactivating ESP®

(Y page 201)RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake

(Y page 201)RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION

ASSIST (Y page 202)RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist

or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 202)RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping

Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist(Y page 202)

200 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Displaying the assistance graphic

X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press 9 or : to select Assist. Graphic.

X Press the a button.The multifunction display shows theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theassistance graphic.

The assistance graphic displays the status ofand information from the following drivingsystems or driving safety systems:RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 70)RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 167)RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 181)RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 183) or Active

Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 188)

Deactivating/activating ESP®

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion in the description of ESP® (Y page 66).

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelActivating/deactivating ESP® on AMG vehi-cles (Y page 68).For further information about ESP®, see(Y page 66).X Start the engine.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectESP.

X Press the a button.X To deactivate: press a again.

The å warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

X To activate: press a again.The å warning lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lampin the instrument cluster lights up continu-ously when the engine is running.If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warn-ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is notavailable due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 238).Observe the information on display messages(Y page 211).

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®

Brake

PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectPRE-SAFE Brake.

Menus and submenus 201

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

X Press the a button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press the abutton again.When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, theassistance graphic shows the æ symbolin the multifunction display.

If the PRE-SAFE Brake: Sensors Deacti‐vated message appears, the radar sensorsystem is deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system

(Y page 205).

For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake,see (Y page 70).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTX Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectAttention Assist.

X Press the a button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press the abutton again.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated,the é symbol appears in the multifunc-tion display in the assistance graphics dis-play.

For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 181).

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectBlind Spot Assist.

X Press the a button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press the abutton again.

If the Blind Spot Assist Sensors Deac‐tivated or Act. Blind Spot Asst. Sen‐sors Deactivated message appears, theradar sensor system is deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system

(Y page 205).For further information about Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 181).For further information about Active BlindSpot Assist, see (Y page 185).

Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistX Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectLane Keep. Asst.

X Press the a button.The current selection is displayed.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to set Off,Standard or Adaptive.

X Press the a button to save the setting.When Lane Keeping Assist or Active LaneKeeping Assist is activated, the multifunc-tion display shows the lane markings asbright lines in the assistance graphic.

For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 183).For further information about Active LaneKeeping Assist, see (Y page 188).

Service menu

Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theServ. menu:

202 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

RCalling up display messages(Y page 210)RChecking the tire pressure electronically

(Y page 309)RCalling up the service due date

(Y page 276)

Settings menu

Introduction

Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, In the Sett. menu you have the fol-lowing options:RChanging the instrument cluster settings

(Y page 203)RChanging the light settings (Y page 203)RChanging the vehicle settings

(Y page 205)RChanging the convenience settings

(Y page 205)RRestoring the factory settings

(Y page 206)

Instrument cluster

Selecting the unit of measurement for dis-tanceYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay shows some messages in miles orkilometers.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theInst. Cluster submenu.

X Press a to confirm.

X Press the : or 9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer func-tion.You will see the selected setting: km ormiles.

X Press the a button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for dis-tance applies to:RDigital speedometer in the Trip menuROdometer and the trip odometerRTrip computerRCurrent consumption and the rangeRNavigation instructions in the Navi menuRCruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Selecting the permanent display functionYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay permanently shows your speed or theoutside temperature.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Settings menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select thePermanent Display: function.You will see the selected setting Outside Temperature or Additional Speedome‐ter [km/h]/Additional Speedometer [mph].

X Press the a button to save the setting.

i The speed is highlighted in km/h or inmph conversely to your speedometer.

Lights

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offDaytime running lamps are required by law(Canada only). You cannot set the "daytimerunning lamps" function via the on-boardcomputer.

Menus and submenus 203

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theDay Lights function.If the Day Lights function has beenswitched on, the cone of light and the Wsymbol in the multifunction display areshown in orange.

X Press the a button to save the setting.Further information on daytime runninglamps (Y page 110).

Activating/deactivating surround light-ing and exterior lighting delayed switch-offX Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theSurround Lighting function.When the Surround Lighting function isactivated, the light cone and the areaaround the vehicle are displayed in orangein the multifunction display.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exte-rior lighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the Smart-

Key to position 0 in the ignition lock.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock.The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start theengine.If you have activated the Surround Light‐ing function and the light switch is set to

Ã, the following functions are activatedwhen it is dark:Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting

remains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the SmartKey. If you start the engine,the surround lighting is switched off andautomatic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 110).Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the

exterior lighting remains lit for 60 secondsafter the engine is switched off. If you closeall the doors and the trunk lid, the exteriorlighting goes off after 5 seconds.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off exterior lighting are on, the fol-lowing light up:RParking lampsRFront fog lampsRLow-beam headlampsRDaytime running lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Activating/deactivating the interior light-ing delayed switch-offIf you activate the Interior Lighting Delay function, the interior lighting remainson for 20 seconds after you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Sett menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theInterior Lighting Delay function.If the Interior Lighting Delay functionhas been switched on, the vehicle interior isdisplayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

204 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismX Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theVehicle submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAuto. Door Locks function.When the Auto. Door Locks function isactivated, the vehicle doors are displayedin orange in the multifunction display.

X Press the a button to save the setting.If you activate the Auto. Door Locks func-tion, the vehicle is centrally locked above aspeed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).For further information on the automatic lock-ing feature, see (Y page 82).

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the Acoustic Lock function,an acoustic signal sounds when you lock thevehicle.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theVehicle submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAcoustic Lock function.If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,the & symbol in the multifunction dis-play lights up orange.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

Activating/deactivating the radar sensorsystemX Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theVehicle submenu.

X Press a to confirm.

X Press the 9 or : button to selectRadar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):.You will see the selected setting: Enabledor Disabled.

X Press the a button to save the setting.The following systems are switched off whenthe radar sensor system is deactivated:RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 162)RBAS PLUS (Y page 65)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 70)RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 181)RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 185)

Convenience

Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function position

buttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-

ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the : or 9 button to select theConvenience submenu.

X Press a to confirm.

Menus and submenus 205

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

X Press the : or 9 button to select theEasy Entry/Exit function.If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activa-ted, the vehicle steering wheel is displayedin orange in the multifunction display.

X Press the a button to save the setting.Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature (Y page 103).

Switching the belt adjustment on/offX Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theConvenience submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theBelt Adjustment function.When the Belt Adjustment function isactivated, the vehicle seat belt is displayedin orange in the multifunction display.

X Press the a button to save the setting.For further information on belt adjustment,see (Y page 56).

Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-ing feature on/offThis function is only available in Canada.This function is only available when the vehi-cle is equipped with the electrical fold-in func-tion.When you switch on the Auto. Mirror Folding function, the exterior mirrors arefolded in when the vehicle is locked. If youunlock the vehicle and then open the driver'sor front-passenger door, the exterior mirrorsfold out again.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theConvenience submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAuto. Mirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror Folding function isswitched on, the vehicle's exterior mirror is

displayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press the a button to save the setting.If you have switched the Auto. Mirror Folding function on and you fold the exteriormirrors in using the button on the door(Y page 105), they will not fold out automat-ically. The exterior mirrors can then only befolded out using the button on the door.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theFactory Setting submenu.

X Press a to confirm.The Reset All Settings? messageappears.

X Press the : or 9 button to select Noor Yes.

X Press the a button to confirm the selec-tion.If you have selected Yes, the multifunctiondisplay shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Day Lights functionin the Lights submenu is only reset if thevehicle is stationary.

AMG menu in AMG vehicles

AMG displays

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperature

206 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMG menu.

Upshift indicator UP = indicates that theengine has reached the overrevving rangewhen in the manual gearshift program.Upshift indicator UP = fades out other mes-sages until you have shifted up.If the oil temperature is below 176 ‡ (80 †),oil temperature ? is shown in blue. Avoiddriving at full engine output during this time.

SETUP

: Drive program (C/SS+/M); ESP® mode (ON/OFF) or SPORT handling

mode (SPORT)

SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®

(Electronic Stability Program) mode and theSPORT handling mode.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the AMG menu.X Press the 9 button repeatedly until

SETUP is displayed.

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMER

: Lap; RACETIMERThe RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the function onpublic roads.

You can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or if the SmartKey is in posi-tion 2 in the ignition lock.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the AMG menu.X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the

RACETIMER is shown.X To start: press the a button to start the

RACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press the = or ; button to selectInterm. Time.

X Press a to confirm.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.

Starting a new lap

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= LapX Press a to confirm New Lap.

i It is possible to store a maximum of six-teen laps. The 16th lap can only be com-pleted with Finish Lap.

Menus and submenus 207

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press the % button on the steeringwheel.

X Press a to confirm Yes.The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stopthe vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the key toposition 3 and then press a to confirmStart, timing is continued.

Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER.X Press = or ; to select Reset Lap.X Press a to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all laps

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER isreset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. Ifyou have stopped 16 laps, the current lapdoes not have to be reset.X Reset the current lap.X Press a to confirm Reset.Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi-function display.

X Press the : button to select Yes andpress the a button to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Overall statistics

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speedThis function is shown if you have stored atleast one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the AMG menu.X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the

overall evaluation is shown.

Lap statistics

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lap

208 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

This function is only available if you havestored at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the AMG menu.X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the

lap evaluation is shown.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-bol :.

X Press the 9 or : button to select adifferent lap evaluation.

Menus and submenus 209

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function(Y page 171) and parking (Y page 153).

Hiding display messagesX Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.

The display message is cleared.The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-play messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-sages have been remedied.

Message memoryThe message memory allows you to call up previous display messages.X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.

If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, for example.X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages.X Press a to confirm.X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.

210 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!÷Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐tor's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hillstart assist are temporarily unavailable.BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Possible causes are:Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-

ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

÷Inoperative See Operator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist areunavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.

Display messages 211

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsThe braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-

ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

T!÷Inoperative See Operator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable dueto a malfunction.BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Please Release Parking Brake

You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone alsosounds.X Release the parking brake.

212 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Brake Immediately

A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function orDISTRONIC PLUS is active.A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lockthe vehicle, the tone becomes louder.You cannot start the engine.X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the

brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disap-pears.

X Use the folding wheel chock (Y page 326) from the vehicle toolkit to secure the vehicle against rolling away.You can restart the engine.

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake Fluid Level

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warninglamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tonesounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

G Inoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunc-tioning.X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified

specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFEInoperative See Operator's Manual

Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 213

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

PRE-SAFEFunctions Cur‐rently Limited See Operator's Manual

PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and the bumper are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.PRE‑SAFE® Brake is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper

(Y page 281).X Restart the engine.X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 68).

PRE-SAFEFunctions Cur‐rently Limited See Operator's Manual

PRE-SAFE® Brake is inoperative due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS orthe distance warning signal may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6SRS Malfunction Service Required

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-ter.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.For further information about SRS, see (Y page 41).

214 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6Front Left Malfunc‐tion Service Required or Front Right Malfunction Service Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear Left Malfunc‐tion Service Required or Rear Right Malfunction Service Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required or Right Side Curtain Air‐bag Malfunction Service Required

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window cur-tain air bag.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig-gered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 215

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Front Passenger Airbag DisabledSee Operator's Man‐ual

The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, eventhough:Ran adult

orRa person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger

seatIf additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may inter-pret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and

switch on the ignition.X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the

center console and the multifunction display and check the fol-lowing:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up

and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled thefront-passenger front air bag (Y page 47)Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in themultifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-tifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies theoccupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-rectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

216 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsFor further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 47).

Front Passenger Airbag EnabledSee Operator's Man‐ual

The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, eventhough:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys-

tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seatorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe system may detect objects or forces applying additionalweight on the seat.

G WARNINGThe air bag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-

passenger seat.X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the

weight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight andinterpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actuallyis.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in thecenter console and the multifunction display and check the fol-lowing:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up

and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Clas-sification System) has disabled the front-passenger front air bag(Y page 47)Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in themultifunction display.

Display messages 217

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsX Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-

tem checks have been completed.X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-

tifunction display.If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies theoccupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-rectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 47).

Lightsi Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters:

The display message for the corresponding light will only appear if all the LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

bCheck Left Corner‐ing Light or Check Right Cornering Light

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 116).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left Low Beam or Check Right Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 116).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear Left Turn Signal or Check Rear Right Turn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

218 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

bCheck Front Left Turn Signal or Check Front Right Turn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left Mirror Turn Signal or Check Right Mirror Turn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isdefective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Center Brake Lamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left Tail and Brake Lamps or Check Right Tail and Brake Lamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 116).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left High Beam or Check Right High Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 116).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bRear Fog Lamp

The rear fog lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front Left Parking Lamp or Check Front Right Parking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 116).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 219

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

bCheck Left Reverse Lamp or Check Right Reverse Lamp

The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 117).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Front Right Sidemarker Lamp

The front left-hand or front right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Rear Right Sidemarker Lamp

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left Daytime Running Light or Check Right Daytime Run‐ning Light

The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bActive Light Sys‐tem Inoperative

The active light function is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction See Operator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAuto Lamp Function Inoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch to Ã.

220 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper-ative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, theAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is dis-played.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+Check Coolant Level See Opera‐tor's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 275).

X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the

nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-

tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Display messages 221

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

?Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not

blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out

and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Other-wise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist

workshop immediately.Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

222 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Open the hood.X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

4Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 273).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 274).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if

engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

Display messages 223

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

4Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart)

AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 273).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 274).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if

engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4Engine Oil Level low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off

The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Check the engine oil level (Y page 273).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 274).

8Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Gas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

224 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ÀAttention Assist: Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigueor a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tonealso sounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀAttention Assist Inoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ëOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 171).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmlydepressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function

(Y page 171).

Radar Sensors Deac‐tivated See Opera‐tor's Manual

The radar sensor system is deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 205).

Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Man‐ual or Active Lane Keeping Assist Cur‐rently Unavailable See Operator's Man‐ual

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivatedand temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period.Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operationalagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Clean the windshield.

Display messages 225

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Lane Keeping Assist Inopera‐tive or Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐tor's Man‐ual or Active Blind Spot Assist Cur‐rently Unavailable See Operator's Man‐ual

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inop-erative. Possible causes are:Rthe sensors are dirty.Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature

range.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-rors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Clean the sensors (Y page 281).X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot Assist Inopera‐tive or Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-rors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking GuidanceInoperative

Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 177).X Restart the engine.If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

226 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Parking GuidanceCanceled

Parking Guidance is deactivated. Possible causes are:Rthe vehicle is skidding.Rthe sensors are dirty.Ra malfunction has occurred.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate Parking Guidance later (Y page 177).If the parking space symbol does not appear in the multifunctiondisplay at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h):X Clean the sensors (Y page 281).X Restart the engine.If the parking space symbol still does not appear in the multifunc-tion display at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h):X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longerfollowing the recommended path.X Park again and, while doing so, observe the display messages in

the multifunction display.

Parking Guidance Finished

The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically.

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 162). If it wasdeactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS Now Available

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 162).

Display messages 227

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐rently Unavailable See Operator's Man‐ual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and the bumper are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper

(Y page 281).X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS Inoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brakemay also have failed.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐pended

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS

(Y page 162).

228 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Cruise Control Inoperative

Cruise control is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control- - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), forexample.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and

store the speed.X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 160).

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

CorrectTire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 309).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 312).

CheckTires

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed

increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly

impair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may

be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a

flat tire (Y page 286).X Check the tire pressure (Y page 309).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Display messages 229

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

WarningTire Malfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGDriving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-

up and possibly a fire.There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a

flat tire (Y page 286).

Tire Press. MonitorCurrently Unavail‐able

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves,no signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tirepressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.X Drive on.

The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been resolved.

TirePress. Sen‐sor(s) Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Mon‐itor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.

The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.

Tire pressure mon‐itorInoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

230 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Shift to 'P' or 'N'to Start Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Risk of RollingTransmission Not in P

You have attempted to stop the engine with the Start/Stop buttonwhile the transmission was not in position P.

G WARNINGThe vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).

While the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is active, you have:Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt orRswitched off the engine orRopened the hoodA tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lockthe vehicle, the tone becomes louder.You cannot start the engine.X Shift the transmission to position P.

You can restart the engine.

N The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.

M The hood is open.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open.X Close all the doors.

Display messages 231

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

_Lock Seat Backrest Front Left or Lock Seat Backrest Front Right

The driver's or front passenger's seat backrest is not engaged. Awarning tone also sounds.X Push the backrest back until it engages.

ÐPower Steering Mal‐function See Oper‐ator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified

specialist workshop.X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the

nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol

appears in the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 275).

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ÂKey Does Not Belong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTake Your Key from Ignition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

232 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ÂReplace Key Battery

The battery of the KEYLESS-GO key is discharged.X Change the battery (Y page 77).

ÂDon't Forget Your Key

The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds andis only a reminder.You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you

leave the vehicle.

ÂKey Not Detected (red display message)

The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehiclecentrally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.

A strong source of radio waves is causing interference and this ispreventing the KEYLESS-GO key from being recognized when theengine is running.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key

mode.

ÂKey Not Detected (white display mes-sage)

The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO

functions in the vehicle.

If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

ÂRemove 'Start' But‐ton and Insert Key

The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warn-ing tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the

desired position.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 233

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notesSome systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, someindicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical.These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash afterstarting the engine or whilst driving.

Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup for 6 seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 55).

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup. In addition, a warn-ing tone sounds for upto 6 seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 55).

The warning tone ceases.

ü

The red seat belt warn-ing lamp lights up afterthe engine starts, assoon as the driver's orthe front-passengerdoor is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 55).

The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow

them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.

234 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ü

The red seat belt warn-ing lamp flashes and anintermittent audiblewarning sounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Thevehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has brieflybeen driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 55).

The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow

them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 235

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning. A warning tonealso sounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the mal-

function.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.

!

The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunc-tion. BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram), PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function andhill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the automatic trans-mission, will not be available.

236 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!

The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, EBD (elec-tronic brake force distribution), PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, theHOLD function, hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, forexample.Possible causes are:Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-

ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 237

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!

The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS,BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD func-tion and hill start assist are also unavailable, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)÷ å !The red brake warninglamp, the yellow ESP®

and ESP® OFF warninglamps and the yellowABS warning lamp arelit while the engine isrunning.

ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore,BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLDfunction and hill start assist, for example, are not available either.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

238 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

֊

The yellow ESP® warn-ing lamp flashes whilethe vehicle is in motion.

ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as

necessary.X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.

In rare cases (Y page 67) , it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 66).

å

The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNING

If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.

In rare cases (Y page 67) , it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 66).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

M

AMG vehicles only:The yellow SPORT han-dling mode warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

SPORT handling mode is activated.

G WARNING

When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the

conditions described in the "Activating/deactivating SPORThandling mode" section (Y page 68).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 239

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷ä åThe yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLDfunction and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

240 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷ åThe yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist aretemporarily unavailable.BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-

ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6

The red SRS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem).

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Drive on carefully.X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-

ately.For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System,see (Y page 41).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 241

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

;

The yellow CheckEngine warning lamplights up while theengine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may bein emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified

specialist workshop.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified special-ist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamplights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in thesestates. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply inthe state in which you are currently driving.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion. In addition,the ; Check Enginewarning lamp may lightup.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler

cap.X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist work-

shop.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine is run-ning.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

242 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

?

The red coolant warn-ing lamp lights up whilethe engine is runningand the coolant tem-perature gauge is at thestart of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge isdefective.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is arisk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continuedriving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 243

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

?

The red coolant warn-ing lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning.

The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator maybe blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunc-tioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not

blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 275). Observe

the warning notes.X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the

engine coolant system checked.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the

nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-

tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?

The red coolant warn-ing lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning. A warning tonealso sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The air-flow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level maybe too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.

244 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsX Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not

blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 275). Observe

the warning notes.X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the

engine coolant system checked.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the

nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-

tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

·

The red distance warn-ing lamp lights up whilethe vehicle is in motion.A warning tone alsosounds.

G WARNINGYou are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your lineof travel at too high a speed.There is a risk of an accident.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to

brake or take evasive action.More information about DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 162) andPRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 70).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 245

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in atleast one of the tires.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed

increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly

impair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may

be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 153).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a

flat tire (Y page 286).X Check the tire pressure (Y page 309).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) flashes forapproximately oneminute and thenremains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tirepressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

246 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Useful information ............................ 248Loading guidelines ............................ 248Stowage areas ................................... 249Features ............................................. 253

247

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.

Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-cle are dependent on the distribution of theload within the vehicle. For this reason, youshould observe the following notes whentransporting a load:RNever exceed the maximum permissible

gross vehicle weight or the gross axleweight rating of the vehicle (including occu-pants). The values are specified on the vehi-cle identification plate on the B-pillar of thedriver's door.RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry

objects.RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-

sible and as low down in the trunk as pos-sible.RThe load must not protrude above the

upper edge of the seat backrests.RAlways place the load against the rear or

front seat backrests. Make sure that theseat backrests are securely locked intoplace.RAlways place the load behind unoccupied

seats if possible.RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel

nets to transport loads and luggage.RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening

materials appropriate for the weight andsize of the load.RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and

wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edgesfor protection.

248 Loading guidelinesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Stowage areas

Stowage spaces

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-ing or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot be

flung around in these or in similar situa-tions.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-

trude from stowage compartments, parcelnets or stowage nets.RClose lockable stowage compartments

while driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,

hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 248).

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X To open: pull handle : and open glove boxflap ;.

X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwardsuntil it engages.

The glove box can only be locked andunlocked using the mechanical key.

X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° clockwise to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key intothe lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwiseto position 1.

i The glove box can be cooled(Y page 132).

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X To open: press left-hand button ; or right-hand button :.The stowage compartment opens.

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, aUSB connection and an AUX IN connectionor a Media Interface are installed in thestowage compartment. A Media Interfaceis a universal interface for portable audioequipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player(see the separate Audio or COMAND Oper-ating Instructions).

Stowage areas 249

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Stowage netStowage nets are located in the front-passenger footwell and on the left-hand sideof the trunk.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 248)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 249).

Rear bench seat through-loading fea-ture

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold for-wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be

pushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intendedlevel of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot be

restrained by the seat backrest.There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 248).The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr-ests can be folded down separately toincrease the trunk capacity.

Folding the seat backrest forward

i Vehicles with memory function: when youfold one or both parts of the rear seat back-rest forwards, the respective front seatmoves forward slightly, when necessary, inorder to avoid contact.

X Vehicles without memory function: if nec-essary, move the driver's or front-passenger seat forwards.

X Open the trunk.X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat back-

rest release handle :.The corresponding rear seat backrest isreleased.

X Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards.X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat

back if necessary.

250 Stowage areasSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Folding the seat backrest back

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-aged.

X Fold rear seat backrest : back until itengages.If the rear seat backrest is not engaged andlocked, this will be shown in the multifunc-tion display in the instrument cluster. Awarning tone also sounds.

i You should always engage the rear seatbackrests if you do not need the through-loading feature. This will prevent unauthor-ized access to the trunk from the vehicleinterior.

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

Securing cargo

Cargo tie-down ringsObserve the following notes on securingloads:RObserve the loading guidelines

(Y page 248).RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down

rings.RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down

rings evenly.

RDo not use elastic straps or nets to securea load, as these are only intended as ananti-slip protection for light loads.RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges

or corners.RPad sharp edges for protection.There are four cargo tie-down rings in thetrunk.

Vehicle with through-loading feature in the rearbench seat: Cargo tie-down rings

Bag hook

G WARNINGThe bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objectsor items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-gage could be flung around and thereby hitvehicle occupants when braking or abruptlychanging directions. There is a risk of injury.Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragileobjects on the bag hooks.

! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of11lbs (5kg) and should not be used tosecure a load.

Stowage areas 251

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

: Bag hook

Stowage well under the trunk floorThe TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. arelocated in the stowage compartment.

X To open: pull handle : up.

X Hook handle : into rain trough ;.

! Unhook the handle before again beforeclosing the trunk lid and clip it in securely toprevent the handle flap from protruding.Otherwise, you could damage the handle.

Roof carrier

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed the maximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use roof carriers that have been testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.This helps to prevent damage to the vehi-cle.Position the load on the roof rack in such away that the vehicle will not sustain dam-age even when it is in motion.Depending on the vehicle equipment,ensure that when the roof carrier is instal-led you can:Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel fullyRopen the trunk lid fully

! To avoid damaging or scratching the cov-ers, do not use metallic or hard objects toopen them.

The maximum roof load is 220 lbs (100 kg).An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roofload may become detached from the vehicle.You must therefore ensure that you observethe roof carrier manufacturer's installationinstructions.

252 Stowage areasSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Attaching the roof carrier

Vehicles with a steel roof

Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panelX Open covers : carefully in the direction of

the arrow.X Fold covers : upwards.X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchor-

age points under covers :.X Observe the manufacturer's installation

instructions.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. Thedrinks could otherwise spill.

G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flung

around, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-ing or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot be

flung around in these or in similar situa-tions.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-

trude from stowage compartments, parcelnets or stowage nets.RClose lockable stowage compartments

while driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,

hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 248).

Cup holder in the front-compartmentcenter console

: Cup holder

Cup holder in the rear stowage box

X To open: slide cover : forwards.

Features 253

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light : only functions if the sun visoris clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover Ahas been folded up.

Glare from the sideX Fold down the sun visor.X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.X Swing the sun visor to the side.

X Pull or push the sun visor in the direction ofthe arrow.

Ashtray

Front ashtray

! The stowage space under the ashtray isnot heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga-rettes in the ashtray, make sure that theashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, thestowage space could be damaged.

i You can remove the ashtray insert anduse the resulting compartment for stow-age.

X To open: slide cover : forwards until itengages.

X To remove the insert: hold insert = bythe ribbing at the sides and lift it up ; andout.

254 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

X To re-install the insert: press insert =into the holder until it engages.

X To close: briefly press cover : at thefront.The cover moves back.

Rear-compartment ashtray

X To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge.X To remove the insert: press release but-

ton = and lift the insert up and out.X To install the insert: install insert : from

above into the holder and press down intothe holder until it engages.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter to

objects, for exampleThere is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attention must always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarette

lighter when road and traffic conditions per-mit.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 135).

X To open: slide cover : forwards until itengages.

X Press in cigarette lighter ;.Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: briefly press cover : at thefront.The cover moves back.

12 V sockets

General notesX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 135).The sockets can be used for accessories witha maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso-ries include such items as lamps or chargersfor mobile phones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to thesockets is automatically cut. This ensuresthat there is sufficient power to start theengine.

Features 255

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Socket in the rear-compartment centerconsole

X Pull cover ; out by its top edge.X Lift up the cover of socket :.

115 V socket

Important safety notes

G DANGERWhen a suitable device is connected, the115 V power socket will be carrying a highvoltage. You could receive an electric shock ifthe connector cable or the 115 V powersocket is pulled out of the trim or is damagedor wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.RUse only connector cables that are dry and

free of damage.RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the

115 V power socket is dry.RHave the 115 V power socket checked or

replaced immediately at a qualified speci-alized workshop if it is damaged or has beenpulled out of the trim.RNever plug the connector cable into a 115 V

power socket that is damaged or has beenpulled out of the trim.

G DANGERIf you reach into the power socket or pluginappropriate devices into the power socket,you could receive an electric shock. There is arisk of fatal injury.

Only connect appropriate devices to thepower socket.

! Note that work and repairs on the 115 Vpower socket should only be carried out byqualified specialist personnel.

General notes115 V power socket : provides an alternat-ing voltage of 115 V so that small electronicdevices can be connected. These devices,such as games consoles, chargers and lap-tops, should not consume more than a maxi-mum of 150 watts altogether.Requirements for operation of these devices:Rthe electronic device that you connect has

a suitable connector and conforms tostandards specific to the country you are in.Rthe plug of the electronic device is plugged

into 115 V power socket :.Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be

connected must not exceed 150 watts.Rthe on-board power supply is within a per-

missible voltage range.

Using the 115 V power socket

X To switch on: switch the ignition on.X Open flap =.X Insert the plug of the electronic device into

115 V power socket :.Indicator lamp ; lights up.

X To switch off: remove the connector from115 V socket :.

256 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

Features 257

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Problems with the 115 V power socket

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The warning lamp onthe 115 V power socketis not lit.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.X Start the engine.orX Charge the battery (Y page 293).

If the indicator lamp still does not light up:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.

If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down theconverter:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You have connected a small electronic device that has a constantnominal power of less than 150 W, but a very high switch-on cur-rent. This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the115 V power socket will not supply it with power.X Connect a suitable device.

mbrace

General notesYou must have a license agreement to acti-vate the mbrace service. Make sure that yoursystem is activated and operational. To log in,press the ï MB Info call button. If any ofthe steps mentioned are not carried out, thesystem may not be activated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367

Shortly after successfully registering with theservice, a user ID and password will be sent toyou by post.USA only: you can use this password to logonto the mbrace area under "Owners Online"at http://www.mbusa.com.The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe corresponding mobile phone network is

available for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer CenterRa service subscription is availableRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

i Determining the location of the vehicle ona map is only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to

the Customer Assistance Center.

258 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceed asfollows:X Press the W or X button on the mul-

tifunction steering wheel.orX Use the volume controller of the audio sys-

tem/COMAND.The system offers various services, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callUSA only: you can find information and adescription of all available features under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has been detec-ted if one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does

not come on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside

Assistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call

button does not light up during self-diag-nosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the

following buttons continues to light up redafter the system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inop‐erative or Service Not Activatedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlinedabove, the system may not operate as expec-ted. In the event of an emergency, help willhave to be summoned by other means.

Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-

cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of

roadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be

seen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.Move to a safe location along with other vehi-cle occupants. In such situations, secure thevehicle in accordance with national regula-tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

You must have a license agreement to acti-vate the mbrace service. Make sure that yoursystem is activated and operational. To reg-ister, press the ï MB Info call button. Ifany of the steps mentioned are not carriedout, the system may not be activated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367

Features 259

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

General notesAn emergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered.

i You cannot end an automatically trig-gered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.As soon as the emergency call has been ini-tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The multifunction display shows theConnecting Call message.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, theCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.All important information on the emergency istransmitted, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as deter-

mined by the GPS system)Rvehicle identification numberRinformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has been ini-tiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the Customer Assis-tance Center and the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter attempts to get more information on theemergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicle

occupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established tothe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter, the system has been unable to initiatean emergency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. Theindicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con-tinuously.The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display and must be confirmed.

In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover : briefly to open.

X Press SOS button ; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button ;flashes until the emergency call is conclu-ded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter.

X After the emergency call, close cover :.

i If the mobile phone network is unavaila-ble, mbrace will not be able to make theemergency call. If you leave the vehicleimmediately after pressing the SOS button,you will not know whether mbrace placedthe emergency call. In this case, alwayssummon assistance by other means.

Roadside Assistance button

260 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

X Press Roadside Assistance button :.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton : flashes while the call is active.The multifunction display shows the Con‐necting Call message. The audio outputis muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification number

i The audio system or COMAND displayindicates that a call is active. During thecall, you can change to the navigation menuby pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.From the remote malfunction diagnosis, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercan ascertain the nature of the problem(Y page 264).The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements foryour vehicle to be transported to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.You may be charged for services such asrepair work and/or towing.Further details are available in your mbracemanual.

i The system has not been able to initiate aRoadside Assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assis-

tance call button : is flashing continu-ously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the ~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for ending

a phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

MB Info call button

X Press MB Info call button :.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in MB Info call button :flashes while the connection is being made.The multifunction display shows the Con‐necting Call message. The audio systemis muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Features 261

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification number

i The audio system or COMAND displayindicates that a call is active. During thecall, you can change to the navigation menuby pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.USA only: you can find further information onthe mbrace system under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

i The system has not been able to initiatean MB Info call, if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call but-

ton : is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the ~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for ending

a phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-gency call will take priority and override allother active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated bythe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steer-

ing wheelRthe corresponding button on the audio sys-

tem or on COMAND for ending a telephonecall

i When a call is initiated, the audio systemis muted. The mobile phone is no longerconnected to COMAND. However, if youwant to use your mobile phone, do so onlywhen the vehicle is stationary and in a safelocation.

Downloading destinations in COMAND

Downloading destinationsDownloading destinations gives you accessto a database with over 15 million points ofinterest (POIs). These can be downloaded onthe navigation system in your vehicle. If youknow the destination, the address can bedownloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain thelocation of Points of Interest (POIs)/impor-tant destinations in the vicinity.You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.

i If you select No, the address can be savedin the address book.

i The destination download function isavailable if the relevant mobile phone net-

262 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

work is available and data transfer is pos-sible.

i The destination download function canonly be used if the vehicle is equipped witha navigation system.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack-age and cannot be purchased separately.

i You can also use the Route Assistancefunction if your vehicle is not equipped witha navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, youreceive a professional and reliable form ofnavigation support without having to leaveyour vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle'scurrent position and the desired destination.You will then be guided live through the cur-rent route section.

Search & Send"Search & Send" is a destination entry ser-vice. You can find further information on"Search & Send" in the separate COMANDoperating instructions.

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle anda replacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote unlock-ing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days, the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:

RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreedupon with the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.

USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can beopened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"

sectionRthe telephone application (e. g. for iPhone®,

Android)To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i Vehicle remote opening is only possible ifthe corresponding mobile phone network isaccessible.

Vehicle remote closingThe valet locking feature can be used whenyou have forgotten to lock the vehicle and youare no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately remotelylocked within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, remote closing maybe delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 daysthe vehicle can no longer be locked remotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-

tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367You will be asked for your password.

Features 263

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can belocked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"

sectionRthe telephone application (e. g. for iPhone®,

Android)To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i The vehicle remote closing feature isavailable when the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.

The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter together with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter contacts you and the local law enforce-ment agency if the vehicle is located.However, only the law enforcement agencyis informed of the location of the vehicle.

i If the anti-theft alarm system is activatedfor longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center is auto-matically notified.

Vehicle Health CheckWith the Vehicle Health Check, the CustomerAssistance Center can provide improved sup-port for problems with your vehicle. During anexisting call, vehicle data is transferred to theCustomer Assistance Center. The customerservice representative can use the receiveddata to decide what kind of assistance isrequired. You are then, for example, guided tothe nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter or a recovery vehicle is called.

If vehicle data needs to be transferred duringan MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,this is initiated by the Customer AssistanceCenter. You will see the Roadside Assis‐tance Connected message in the COMANDdisplay. If the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis can be started, the Request for vehicle diagnosis received. Start vehicle diagnosis? message appears inthe display.X Confirm the message with Yes.X When the Vehicle Diagnosis Please start ignition message appears, turnthe SmartKey to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 135).

X When the Please follow the instruc‐tions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe positionmessage appears, follow the customer ser-vice representative's instructions.The message in the display disappears.If you select Cancel the remote malfunc-tion diagnosis is canceled completely.The vehicle operating state check begins.You will see the Vehicle diagnosis activated message.

When the diagnosis is completed, the Trans‐fer vehicle diagnostics data (Voice connection may be interrupted dur‐ing data transfer) message appears. Thevehicle data can now be sent to the CustomerAssistance center.X Press OK to confirm the message.

The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance Center is terminated.You will see the Vehicle diagnosis: Transferring data... message.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice con-nection is re-established after the transfer iscomplete. If necessary, you will be contactedat a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone.

264 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Another function of the Vehicle Health Checkis the transfer of service data to the CustomerAssistance Center. If a service is overdue, theCOMAND display shows a message aboutvarious special offers at your workshop.USA only: this information can also be calledup under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 23).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transferand save predefined routes in the navigationsystem. To do this, an SD memory card mustbe inserted into the COMAND system. If noSD memory card is inserted, you must insertthe card into the card slot on the COMANDsystem before saving.A route can be prepared and sent either by acustomer service representative or via thembrace portal on the Internet.Each route can include up to 20 way points.Once a route has been received by the navi-gation system, you will see the <route name> has been saved to memory card. Do you want to start route guidance?message in the COMAND display. The route issaved to the SD memory card.X To start route guidance: select Yes.

An overview of the route is shown in thedisplay.

i If you select No, the saved route can becalled up later via the navigation menu.

X Select Start.Route guidance is started.

i Downloaded and saved data can be calledup again in COMAND.You can find further information in the sep-arate COMAND Operating Instructions.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi-cle, a message will be sent to the CustomerAssistance Center. The Customer AssistanceCenter then forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receivethis information beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit was

exceededRthe time at which the speed limit was

exceededRthe selected speed limit which was excee-

ded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areas whichthe vehicle should not enter or leave. You willbe informed if the vehicle crosses the boun-daries of the selected areas. You can selectthe way in which you receive this informationbeforehand. Possible options include textmessage, e-mail or an automated call.The area can be determined as either a circleor a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.You can specify up to ten areas simultane-ously. Different settings are possible for eacharea.USA only: these settings can be called upunder "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info calland inform the customer service representa-tive that you wish to activate geo fencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated bytext message.

Features 265

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger the vehi-cle's panic alarm via text message. An alarmsounds and the exterior lighting flashes.Depending on the setting, the panic alarmlasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, thealarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notes

The HomeLink® garage door opener integra-ted in the rear-view mirror allows you to oper-ate up to three different door and gate sys-tems.Use the integrated garage door opener onlyon garage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsOnce programed, the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror will assume thefunction of the garage door system's remotecontrol. Please also read the operatinginstructions for the garage door system.When programming a garage door opener,park the vehicle outside the garage. Do notrun the engine while programming.Certain garage door drives are incompatiblewith the integrated garage door opener. If youhave difficulty programing the integratedgarage door opener, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the following tele-phone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at

1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free

of charge)More information on HomeLink® and/orcompatible products is also available onlineat http://www.homelink.com.

Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 25).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Programming

Programming buttonsPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 266).

Garage door remote control A is not inclu-ded with the integrated garage door opener.

266 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 135).

X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use tocontrol the garage door drive.

X To start programming mode: press andhold one of buttons ; to ? on the inte-grated garage door opener.The garage door opener is now in program-ming mode. After a short time, indicatorlamp : lights up yellow.Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soonas button ;, = or ? is programmed forthe first time. If the selected button hasalready been programmed, indicatorlamp : will only light up yellow after tenseconds have elapsed.

X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicatorlamp : flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: pointgarage door remote control A towardsbuttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror ata distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm).

X Press and hold button B on remote controlA until indicator lamp : lights up green.When indicator lamp : lights up green:programming is finished.When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step isto synchronize the rolling code(Y page 267).

X Release button B on remote control A forthe garage door drive system.If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat theprograming procedure for the correspond-ing button on the rear-view mirror. Whendoing so, vary the distance between remotecontrol A and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remotecontrol A and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might be neces-sary. You should test every position for atleast 25 seconds before trying anotherposition.

Synchronizing the rolling codePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 266).If the garage door system uses a rolling code,you will also have to synchronize the garagedoor system with the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror. To do this youwill need to use the programming button onthe door drive control panel. The program-ming button may be positioned at differentlocations depending on the manufacturer. Itis usually located on the door drive unit on thegarage ceiling.Familiarize yourself with the garage doordrive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro-gramming of additional remote controls",before carrying out the following steps.Your vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or gate opener drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 135).X Get out of the vehicle.X Press the programming button on the door

drive unit.Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini-tiate the next step.

X Get into the vehicle.X Press previously programmed button ;,= or ? on the integrated garage dooropener until the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Notes on programming the remote con-trolCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated garage dooropener. The signal is not recognized duringprogramming. Comparable with Canadian

Features 267

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

law, some U.S. garage door openers also fea-ture a "break".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming the

garage door opener (regardless of whereyou live) when using the programmingsteps

X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp : lightsup yellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.

X Press button B of garage door remotecontrol A for two seconds, then release itfor two seconds.

X Press button B again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on button B of

remote control A until indicator lamp :lights up green.When indicator lamp : lights up green:programming is finished.When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step isto synchronize the rolling code.

X Release button B of remote control A ofthe garage door drive.If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat theprogramming process for the correspond-ing button on the rear-view mirror. Whendoing so, vary the distance between remotecontrol A and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remotecontrol A and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might be neces-sary. You should test every position for atleast 25 seconds before trying anotherposition.

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problems programingthe integrated garage door opener on therear-view mirror, take note of the followinginstructions:RCheck the transmitter frequency used by

garage door drive remote control A andwhether it is supported. The transmitterfrequency can usually be found on the backof the garage door drive remote control.The integrated garage door opener is com-patible with devices that have units whichoperate in the frequency range of 280 to433 MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage door

remote control A. This increases the like-lihood that garage door remote control Awill transmit a strong and precise signal tothe integrated garage door opener.RWhen programming, hold remote controlA at varying distances and angles from thebutton which you are programming. Try var-ious angles at a distance between 2and12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same anglebut at varying distances.RIf another remote control is available for the

same garage door drive, repeat the sameprogramming steps with this remote con-trol. Before performing these steps, makesure that new batteries have been installedin garage door drive remote control A.RNote that some remote controls only trans-

mit for a limited amount of time (the indi-cator lamp on the remote control goes out).Press button B on remote control A againbefore transmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door

opener unit. This can improve signal recep-tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function ofthe garage door system remote control.

268 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Please also read the operating instructionsfor the garage door system.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 135).X Press button ;, = or ? which you have

programmed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-cator lamp : lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code:indicator lamp : flashes green.The transmitter will transmit a signal aslong as the button is pressed. The trans-mission is halted after a maximum of tenseconds and indicator lamp : lights upyellow.

X Press button ;, = or ? again if neces-sary.

Clearing the memoryMake sure that you clear the memory of theintegrated garage door opener before sellingthe vehicle.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 135).X Press and hold buttons ; and ?.

The indicator lamp initially lights up yellowand then green.

X Release buttons ; and ?.The memory of the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use

loose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

X Slide the seat backwards.X To install: place the floormat in the foot-

well.X Press studs : onto retainers ;.X To remove: pull the floormat off retain-

ers ;.X Remove the floormat.

Features 269

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

270

Useful information ............................ 272Engine compartment ........................ 272ASSYST PLUS .................................... 276Care .................................................... 277

271

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving. Beforeevery trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is a

risk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-

ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or fuel injection system when the ignitionis switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set in motion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

272 Engine compartmentM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Pull release lever : on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch han-dle ; up and lift the hood.If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in(40 cm), the hood is opened and held openautomatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a height

of approximately 8 in (20 cm).X Check that the hood has engaged properly.

If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and closeit with a little more force.

Engine oil

General notes on the oil levelDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumptionmay be higher than this when the vehicle isnew or if you frequently drive at high enginespeeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe in a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off for

approximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operating

temperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly, wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

Engine compartment 273

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

Example: AMG vehiclesX Park the vehicle on a level surface.

To check the oil level with the engine atoperating temperature, switch the engineoff and wait for approximately five minutes.

X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick :.X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide

tube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark = andMAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark =or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) engine oil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with a ser-vice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have

not been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters after

the interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level isabove the "max" mark on the dipstick, toomuch oil has been added. This can lead todamage to the engine or the catalytic con-verter. Have excess oil siphoned off.

Example: engine oil capX Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove

it.X Add engine oil.

If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark onthe oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) ofengine oil.

274 Engine compartmentM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dip-stick (Y page 273).

Further information on engine oil(Y page 345).

Checking and adding other serviceproducts

Checking coolant level

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is pressurized, par-ticularly when the engine is warm. Whenopening the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before opening thecap. Wear eye and hand protection whenopening the cap. Open the cap slowly half aturn to allow pressure to escape.

Only check the coolant level when the vehicleis on a level surface and the engine has cooleddown.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 135).On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 136).

X Check the coolant temperature display inthe instrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clockwise and allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank ;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the fuelfiller neck when warm, there is enoughcoolant in expansion tank ;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 346).

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system/headlamp cleaningsystem

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

Engine compartment 275

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck

until it engages.The washer fluid reservoir is used for both thewindshield washer system and the headlampcleaning system.On vehicles with the headlamp cleaning sys-tem, the recommended minimum washerfluid level is 3.5 liters.On vehicles without a headlamp cleaning sys-tem, the recommended minimum washerfluid level is 1 liter.If the washer fluid level drops below 1 liter, amessage appears in the multifunction displayprompting you to refill the washer fluid(Y page 232).Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 347).

ASSYST PLUS

Service messagesThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.

Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate MaintenanceBooklet).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on theengine oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 273).

The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in .. DaysRService A DueRService A Exceeded by ... DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance untilthe next service due date is displayed.The letter A or B, possibly in connection with anumber or another letter, shows the type ofservice. A stands for a minor service and B fora major service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not take into account any periods oftime during which the battery is disconnec-ted.Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayed

in the multifunction display before discon-necting the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtract

the battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press the % or a button on the steer-

ing wheel.

276 ASSYST PLUSM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Serv. menu.X Press the 9 or : button to select theASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm bypressing the a button.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display

! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-play has been inadvertently reset, this set-ting can be corrected at a qualified special-ist workshop.Have service work carried out as describedin the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth-erwise lead to increased wear and damageto the major assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will resetthe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayafter the service work has been carried out.You can also obtain further information onmaintenance work, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specified maintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditionsor increased load on the vehicle, mainte-nance work must be carried out more fre-quently, for example:Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi-

ate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travel

short distances

Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long peri-

odsUnder these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires mustbe checked more often. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialist work-shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter.

Driving abroadAn extensive Mercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any

of the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsible man-ner.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, you

Care 277

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

should drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents rec-ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Exterior care

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that the automatic transmis-sion is in position N when washing yourvehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehi-cle could be damaged if the transmission isin another position.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof

are fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off

(the OFF button has been pressed).Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position

0.

Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windshield and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on the wind-shield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in all coun-tries concerned.X Do not use hot water and do not wash the

vehicle in direct sunlight.X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car

shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a

gentle jet of water.X Do not point the water jet directly towards

the air inlet.X Use plenty of water and rinse out the

sponge frequently.X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry

thoroughly with a chamois.X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the

paintwork.When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.

278 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of yourvehicle are covered with a decorative foil.Maintain a distance of at least 70 cmbetween the foil-wrapped parts of the vehi-cle and the nozzle of the power washer.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipment manufac-turer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the paintworkScratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused by inade-quate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,

while avoiding rubbing too hard.X Soak insect remains with insect remover

and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse

off the treated areas afterwards.X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,

oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.

! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Care 279

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.This is the case approximately every three tofive months, depending on the climate con-ditions and the care product used.If the dirt has penetrated the paint surface orif the paintwork has become dull, then thepaintwork should be cleaned. Use the clean-ing product Paint Cleaner, which has beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB

Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage tothe paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish careIf your vehicle has a clear matte finish,observe the following instructions in order toavoid damage to the paintwork due to incor-rect care.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate-

rials.RFrequent use of car washes.RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerable sur-face damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampooand plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of approved Mercedes-Benzcare products.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Only fold the windshield wipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of the windows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.There is otherwise a risk of damaging thewindows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certain circumstan-ces prevent water from draining away. Thiscan lead to corrosion damage and damageto electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the win-dows with a damp cloth and a cleaningproduct that is recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

280 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Only fold the windshield wipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlighting using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo. Or clean the exterior lightingwith cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo. Cleaning cloths may be used aswell.

Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a dis-tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) betweenthe vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipment manufac-turer.

X Clean sensors : of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

Care 281

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to cleancamera lens :.

Cleaning the exhaust pipes

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.

Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhausttail pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially inwinter and after washing.X Clean the exhaust tail pipes with a chrome

care product tested and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Interior care

Cleaning the display

! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-lowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household clean-

ing agentsThese may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-ble damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth andTFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-fiber cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-ces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

282 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use

leather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-ments

! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk ofdamaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum andcan lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim piecesare chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces witha damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean gen-

uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA

covers. If used often, these can damage thecover.

i Note that regular care is essential toensure that the appearance and comfort ofthe covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat coversLeather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:Rdifferences in the textureRmarks caused by growth and injuryRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefully

with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-ers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does not

become soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that have

been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth

moistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth

moistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and always wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leavethe seat to dry afterwards. Cleaningresults depend on the type of dirt andhow long it has been there.Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp

cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire

Care 283

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

seat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsby heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-tion.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush

or a cleaning agent recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-ing agents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

284 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Useful information ............................ 286Where will I find...? ........................... 286Flat tire .............................................. 286Battery (vehicle) ................................ 291Jump-starting .................................... 294Towing and tow-starting .................. 296Fuses .................................................. 298

285

Road

side

Ass

ista

nce

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kitThe vehicle tool kit can be found in the stow-age well under the trunk floor.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 252).X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 288).

: Vehicle tool kit tray; Stowage well= Spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency

spare wheelThe vehicle tool kit contains:RFolding wheel chockRFuse allocation chartRJackROne pair of glovesRLug wrenchRTowing eye

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat prop-

erties) (Y page 287)Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOExtended tiresRa TIREFIT kit (Y page 286)Ra spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency

spare wheel (Y page 338)Information on changing/mounting a wheel(Y page 325).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and

level ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away

(Y page 153).X If possible, bring the front wheels into the

straight-ahead position.X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove

the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the

driver's door.The on-board electronics have status 0,which is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 136).

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed. Any-one who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-fic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

286 Flat tireRo

adsi

de A

ssis

tanc

e

i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires. The affectedtire must not show any clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index(Y page 319).MOExtended tires may only be used in con-junction with an active tire pressure monitor.If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display:Robserve the instructions in the display mes-

sages (Y page 229).Rcheck the tire for damage.Rif driving on, observe the following notes.The driving distance possible in run-flat modeis approximately 50 miles (80 km) when thevehicle is partially laden and approximately18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fullyladen.In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-tance possible depends upon:Rvehicle speedRroad conditionRoutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme driving condi-

tions/maneuvers, or it can be increasedthrough a moderate style of driving.The driving distance possible in run-flat modeis counted from the moment the tire pressureloss warning appears in the multifunction dis-play.You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).

i When replacing one or all tires, pleaseobserve the following specifications foryour vehicle's tires:RsizeRtype andRthe "MOExtended" markIf a tire has gone flat and cannot bereplaced with a MOExtended tire, a stand-ard tire may be used as a temporary meas-ure. Make sure that you use the proper sizeand type (summer or winter tire).

i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.

Flat tire 287

Road

side

Ass

ista

nce

Z

RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem-peratures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger

than those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or

on a flat tire.There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do notinhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin

immediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with

your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.

RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical

attention immediately.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compres-sor for longer than eight minutes at a timewithout a break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be oper-ated again once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer’s safetyinstructions on the sticker on the tire inflationcompressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

TIREFIT sticker, 2-partX Do not remove any foreign objects which

have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws ornails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom-panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire infla-tion compressor from the stowage wellunderneath the trunk floor (Y page 286).

X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to theinstrument cluster within the driver's fieldof vision.

X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

288 Flat tireRo

adsi

de A

ssis

tanc

e

X Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A outof the housing.

X Screw hose A onto flange B of tire seal-ant bottle :.

X Place tire sealant bottle : head down-wards into recess ; of the tire inflationcompressor.

X Remove the cap from valve C on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.X Insert connector ? into the cigarette

lighter socket (Y page 255) or into a 12 Vsocket (Y page 255) in your vehicle.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 135).

X Press on/off switch = on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated.

i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.The pressure can briefly rise to approx-imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch off the tire inflation com-pressor during this phase.

X Allow the tire inflation compressor to runfor five minutes. The tire should then haveattained a pressure of at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes, see "Tirepressure reached" (Y page 290).If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has not been attained after five minutes, see"Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 289).

i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. Itcan then be removed like a layer of film.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,have them cleaned with perchloroethyleneat a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasnot been attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of

the faulty tire.X Very slowly drive forwards or back up

approximately 30 ft (10 m).X Pump up the tire again.

After a maximum of five minutes the tirepressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Flat tire 289

Road

side

Ass

ista

nce

Z

Tire pressure reachedIf a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has been attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of

the faulty tire.

! After use, excess tire sealant may run outof the filler hose. This could cause stains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag that contained the TIREFIT kit.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Pull away immediately.

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tiresealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper partof the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to theinstrument cluster in the driver's field ofvision.X Stop after driving for approximately ten

minutes and check the tire pressure withthe tire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In cases such as the one mentionedabove, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can-ada).

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver'sside B-pillar or the tire pressure table in thefuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch onthe tire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: depresspressure release button E next to pres-sure gauge F.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrewthe filler hose from the valve of the sealedtire.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve ofthe sealed tire.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tireinflation compressor.The filler hose remains attached to the tiresealant bottle.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialistworkshop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced assoon as possible at a qualified specialistworkshop.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

290 Flat tireRo

adsi

de A

ssis

tanc

e

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installation. You should there-fore have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or theESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.You could lose control of the vehicle, forexample:Rwhen brakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuvers

and/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP®,see (Y page 64) and (Y page 66).

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gas mixture forms whencharging the battery as well as when jump-starting.Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, forexample:Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic

fibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across the

carpet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a

connected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-

tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-

bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the

battery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe the

described order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery

terminals while the engine is running.

Battery (vehicle) 291

Road

side

Ass

ista

nce

Z

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the Main-tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. In the exceptional case that it isnecessary for you to disconnect the batteryyourself, make sure that:Ryou switch off the engine and remove the

SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switchedoff. Check that all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,electronic components, such as thealternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminal

clamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.

Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys-tem may be damaged.Rthe transmission is locked in position P

after disconnecting the battery. The vehi-cle is secured against rolling away. Youcan then no longer move the vehicle.

The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-tact with skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron and face-guard.Rinse any acid spills immediatelywith clear water. Contact a physi-cian if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-mum possible service life, it must always besufficiently charged.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainlyfor short trips or if you leave it standing idlefor a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop if you wish to leave yourvehicle parked for a long period of time.

292 Battery (vehicle)Ro

adsi

de A

ssis

tanc

e

Like other batteries, the vehicle battery maydischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the battery discon-nected at a qualified specialist workshop. Youcan also charge the battery with a chargerrecommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact aqualified specialist workshop for further infor-mation.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electricalconsumers. The vehicle will then use verylittle energy, thus conserving batterypower.

i If the power supply has been interrupted,e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you willhave to:Rset the clock; see the separate operating

instructions.On vehicles with COMAND and a naviga-tion system, the clock is set automati-cally.Rreset the function for folding the exterior

mirrors in/out automatically by foldingthe mirrors out once (Y page 105)4.

Charging the battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with

plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only charge the installed battery with abattery charger which has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. These batterychargers allow the battery to be chargedwhile still installed in the vehicle.

! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 294).X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positive

terminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donor bat-tery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 294).

X Read the battery charger's operatinginstructions before charging the battery.

4 This function is only available in vehicles for Canada.

Battery (vehicle) 293

Road

side

Ass

ista

nce

Z

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of apositive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty ofclean water and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with

vehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting

and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting

the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGNon-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoidrepeated and lengthy starting attempts.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,

jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.

294 Jump-startingRo

adsi

de A

ssis

tanc

e

ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected

for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rbare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the

jumper cables are connected to the battery.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.X Apply the parking brake firmly.X Move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.

Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B

using the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using

the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from

positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your ownvehicle first.

Jump-starting 295

Road

side

Ass

ista

nce

Z

X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou can no longer steer the vehicle if thesteering wheel lock has been engaged. Thereis a risk of an accident.Always switch off the ignition when towing thevehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-

over.There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Details on the permissible gross vehicleweight of your vehicle can be found on thevehicle identification plate (Y page 342).

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations.To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-tion in the following or other similar situa-tions:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbe damaged.

! Do not use the towing eyes for recoverypurposes as this could damage the vehicle.If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use theSmartKey instead of the Start/Stop but-ton. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock and shift the automatic trans-mission to N. Then, turn the SmartKey backto 0 and leave it in the ignition lock.

It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed away.The automatic transmission must be in posi-tion N when the vehicle is being towed.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in

the ignition lockRcannot shift the automatic transmission to

position NRelease the selector lever lock manually tomove it out of position P (Y page 150).

296 Towing and tow-startingRo

adsi

de A

ssis

tanc

e

i Disarm the automatic locking featurebefore the vehicle is towed (Y page 82). Youcould otherwise be locked out when push-ing or towing the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There isa risk of burns when removing the rear cover.Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particularcare when removing the rear cover.

X Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit (Y page 286).

The mountings for the removable towing eyesare located in the bumpers. They are at thefront and at the rear, behind the covers.

X Take cover : off the opening.X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as

it will go and tighten it.

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.

X Attach cover : to the bumper and pressuntil it engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe ground

It is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 296).X Switch on the hazard warning lamps

(Y page 113).i When towing with the hazard warning

lamps switched on, use the combinationswitch as usual to signal a change of direc-tion. In this case, only the indicator lampsfor the direction of travel flash. After reset-ting the combination switch, the hazardwarning lamp starts flashing again.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.

Towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised

Only possible for vehicles without 4MATIC.When towing your vehicle with the rear axleraised, it is important that you observe thesafety instructions (Y page 296).

! The ignition must be switched off if youare towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised. Intervention by ESP® could other-wise damage the brake system.

Towing and tow-starting 297

Road

side

Ass

ista

nce

Z

X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 113).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock and remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock.

X When leaving the vehicle, take the Smart-Key or the KEYLESS-GO key with you.

Transporting the vehicleThe towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transportingpurposes.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock.X Move the selector lever to N.

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by

applying the parking brake.X Move the selector lever to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-

tion lock and remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock.

X Secure the vehicle.

! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise,the vehicle could be damaged.

Notes on 4MATIC vehicles! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed

with either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

If the vehicle has transmission damage ordamage to the front or rear axle, have it trans-ported on a transporter or trailer.In the event of damage to the electrical system

If the battery is defective, the automatictransmission will be locked in position P. Toshift the automatic transmission to positionN, you must provide power to the vehicle'selectrical system in the same way as whenjump-starting (Y page 294).Have the vehicle transported on a transporteror trailer.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)

! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be started by tow-starting. Thiscould otherwise damage the transmission.

You can find information on "Jump-starting" at(Y page 294).

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Otherwise, components or sys-tems could be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart.

298 FusesRo

adsi

de A

ssis

tanc

e

If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-cialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Before changing a fuseX Secure the vehicle against rolling away

(Y page 153).X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-

tion lock and remove it (Y page 135).orX On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure

the ignition is switched off (Y page 136).All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box in the engine compartment on the

left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewedin the direction of travelRFuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side

of the vehicle, when viewed in the directionof travel

The fuse allocation chart is located in thevehicle tool kit in the stowage compartmentunder the trunk floor (Y page 286).

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set in motion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Open the hood.

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisturefrom the fuse box.

X To open: take lines ; from the guides.X Open clamps :.X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.X To close: check whether the rubber seal is

lying correctly in the cover.X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box

into the retainer.X Fold down cover and close clamps :.X Secure lines ; in the guides.X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the trunk! Make sure that no moisture can enter the

fuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the trunk lid.

Fuses 299

Road

side

Ass

ista

nce

Z

X To open: release cover : at the top andopen it downwards in the direction of thearrow.

300 FusesRo

adsi

de A

ssis

tanc

e

Useful information ............................ 302Important safety notes ..................... 302Operation ........................................... 302Winter operation ............................... 304Tire pressure ..................................... 306Loading the vehicle .......................... 313Maximum load rating ....................... 316Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards .......................................... 317Tire labeling ....................................... 318Definition of terms for tires andloading ............................................... 322Changing a wheel .............................. 325Mounting a wheel ............................. 325Wheel and tire combinations ........... 329Emergency spare wheel ................... 338

301

Whe

els

and

tires

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your

emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and warn-

ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not beingused correctly can impair the operatingsafety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on the sizes and types of wheelsand tires for your vehicle can be found in the"Wheel/tire combination" section(Y page 329).Information on tire pressure can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-

tion placard on the B-pillar (Y page 313)Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler

flap (Y page 151)Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 306)

Operation

Information on drivingRCheck the tire pressure when the vehicle is

heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,

noises and unusual handling characteris-tics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indi-cate that the wheels or tires are damaged.If you suspect that a tire is defective,reduce your speed immediately. Stop thevehicle as soon as possible to check thewheels and tires for damage. Hidden tiredamage could also be causing the unusualhandling characteristics. If you find no

302 OperationW

heel

s an

d tir

es

signs of damage, have the tires and wheelschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that

the tires do not get deformed by the curb orother obstacles. If it is necessary to driveover curbs, speed humps or similar eleva-tions, try to do so slowly and at an obtuseangle. Otherwise, the tires, particularly thesidewalls, may be damaged.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

RRegularly check the wheels and tires ofyour vehicle for damage at least once amonth, as well as after driving off-road oron rough roads. Damaged wheels cancause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particularattention to damage such as:- cuts in the tires- punctures- tears in the tires- bulges on tires- deformation or severe corrosion on

wheelsRRegularly check the tire tread depth and

the condition of the tread across the wholewidth of the tire (Y page 303). If necessary,turn the front wheels to full lock in order toinspect the inner side of the tire surface.RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect

the valve against dirt and moisture. Do notmount anything onto the valve other thanthe standard valve cap or other valve capsapproved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehi-cle. Do not use any other valve caps or sys-

tems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring sys-tems.RRegularly check the pressure of all the tires

particularly prior to long trips. Adjust thetire pressure as necessary (Y page 306).

Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 338).The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Notes on tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Operation 303

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Marking : shows where the bar indicator(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into thetire tread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned on the tiretread. They are visible once a tread depth ofapproximately á in (1.6 mm) has beenreached. If this is the case, the tire is so wornthat it must be replaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the same

type and make.Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-ferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics)" section(Y page 287).ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto

the wheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for

the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reachtheir full performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too little

tread depth, as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the lat-

est, regardless of wear.Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 338).

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

With MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used in con-junction with an active tire pressure monitorand only on wheels specifically tested byMercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tires in theevent of a flat tire can be found in the "Break-down assistance" section (Y page 287).

i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Winter operation

Points to rememberHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 325).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehi-cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at verycold temperatures could cause cracks toform, thereby damaging the tires perma-nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot acceptresponsibility for this type of damage.

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.

304 Winter operationW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use win-ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tireare identified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing the i snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-ditions. Only these tires will allow drivingsafety systems such as ABS and ESP® tofunction optimally in winter. These tires havebeen developed specifically for driving insnow.Use M+S tires of the same make and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handling charac-teristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 309).X Restart the tire pressure monitor

(Y page 309).For more information on driving with theemergency spare wheel, see (Y page 338).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This could

cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the front

wheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to the

rear wheels.

! On some tire sizes there is not enoughspace for snow chains. To avoid damage tothe vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel andtire combinations" section under "Tires andwheels".

! Vehicles with steel wheels: if youmount snow chains on steel wheels, youmay damage the hub caps. Remove the hubcaps from the relevant wheels beforemounting the snow chains.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains thathave been specially approved for your vehicleby Mercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality. For more information,please contact a qualified specialist work-shop.If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on all

wheel/tire combinations. Permissiblewheel-tire combinations (Y page 329).ROnly use snow chains when driving on

roads completely covered by snow.Remove the snow chains as soon as possi-ble when you come to a road that is notsnow-covered.RLocal regulations may restrict the use of

snow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-ulations if you wish to mount snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissible

speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).

i You may wish to deactivate ESP®

(Y page 66) when pulling away with snowchains installed. You can thereby allow thewheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach-

Winter operation 305

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

ieving an increased driving force (cuttingaction).

For more information on driving with theemergency spare wheel, see (Y page 338).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specificationsUse a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure. You can also check the tirepressure using the on-board computer.

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load

and vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or

unevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-

ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.

off-road drivingIf necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.1.) Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehi-cle (Y page 313).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for

cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.

i The specifications given on the followingTire and Loading Information placard areexamples. Tire pressure specifications arevehicle-specific and may deviate from thedata shown here. The tire pressures appli-cable to your vehicle can be found on theTire and Loading Information placard onyour vehicle.

: Recommended tire pressuresOption 2) Tire pressure table on the inside ofthe fuel filler flap.The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for variousoperating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.

i Specifications shown in the examples oftire pressure tables are for illustration pur-poses only. Tire pressure specifications arevehicle-specific and may deviate from thedata shown here. Tire pressure specifica-tions applicable to your vehicle are locatedin your vehicle's tire pressure table.

306 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factory

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in thetable for different numbers of occupants andamounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may differ.

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.R18. Rim diameter is part of the tire size andcan be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 319).

If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be reset tothe higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased load

and/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds

i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in thetire pressure table, may have a negativeeffect on driving comfort.

Option 3) The tire pressure for the emer-gency/collapsible spare wheel (dependingon vehicle equipment) can be found:Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the emer-

gency/collapsible spare wheelRin the "Wheel and tire combinations" sec-

tion (Y page 329) in this Operator's ManualRon the Tire and Loading Information placard

on the B-pillar on the driver's sideIf the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.

Tire pressure 307

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the

valve is leaking.If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

To test tire pressure, use a suitable tire pres-sure gauge. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe electronic tire pressure monitor, the tirepressure can be checked in the on-boardcomputer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-ent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked without

direct sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven further

than 1 mile (1.6 km)The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when check-ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correctthe tire pressure if it is too low for the currentoperating conditions. If you check the tirepressure when the tires are warm, the result-

ing value will be higher than if the tires werecold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tirepressure to the value specified for cold tires.The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard

on the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of the

fuel filler flapRprinted in yellow on the rim of the emer-

gency/collapsible spare wheel (dependingon vehicle equipment)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Rwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumptionRoverheat, leading to tire defectsRhave an adverse effect on handling charac-

teristics

Overinflation

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.

308 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rhave an adverse effect on handling charac-

teristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRbe more susceptible to damageRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRincrease the braking distance

Maximum tire pressuresNever exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the rec-ommended tire pressure for your vehiclewhen adjusting the tire pressure(Y page 306).

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the "tire pressure information" sec-tion (Y page 306).

Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-

tion placard on the B-pillarRon the tire pressure label on the fuel filler

flapRin the "Tire pressure information" section

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pres-sure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to

be checked.X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto

the valve.X Read the tire pressure and compare with

the recommended values of the Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillarof the driver's side of your vehicle.

X If necessary, increase the tire pressure toattain the recommended value(Y page 306).

X If the tire pressure is too high, let out air. Doso by pressing down the metal pin in thevalve. Then check the tire pressure againusing the tire pressure checker.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-cle's wheels have sensors that monitor thetire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres-sure monitor warns you if the pressure dropsin one or more of the tires. The tire pressuremonitor only functions if the correspondingsensors are installed on all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a few minutesof driving, the current tire pressure of each

Tire pressure 309

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

tire is shown in the Service menu of the mul-tifunction display.

Example: current tire pressure display

For information on the message display, referto the "Checking the tire pressure electroni-cally" section (Y page 311).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the pressure rec-ommended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressurelabel on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than thesize indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard or the tire pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire pressure forthose tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Underinflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle's handling and stop-ping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-er's responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has not

reached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with thelow tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the warning lamp willflash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists.When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,the system may not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-tions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of incompatiblereplacement or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-tioning properly. Always check the TPMS mal-function telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure thatthe replacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to function prop-erly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 306). Note that the correct tire pres-sure for the current operating situation mustfirst be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.If there is a substantial loss of pressure, thewarning threshold for the warning message isaligned to the reference values taught-in.Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjust-ing the pressure of the cold tires(Y page 312). The current pressures aresaved as new reference values. As a result, awarning message will appear if the tire pres-sure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 306).

310 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn-ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat-ing a pressure loss or malfunction. Whetherthe warning lamp flashes or lights up indi-cates whether a tire pressure is too low or thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the

tire pressure on one or more tires is signif-icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor isnot malfunctioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a

minute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

i In addition to the warning lamp, a mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.Observe the information on display mes-sages (Y page 229).

It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunc-tion of the tire pressure monitor to be indica-ted. A malfunction will be indicated by the tirepressure warning lamp flashing for approx-imately one minute and then remaining lit.When the malfunction has been rectified, thetire pressure warning lamp goes out after afew minutes of driving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge.The tire pressures shown by the on-boardcomputer refer to those measured at sealevel. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val-ues indicated by a pressure gauge are higherthan those shown by the on-board computer.In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressure monitor canbe affected by interference from radio trans-mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones,two-way radios) that may be being operatedin or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

2 in the ignition lock (Y page 135).X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Service menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectTire Pressure.

X Press the a button.The current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for over20 minutes, the Tire pressures will be displayed after driving a few minutes message appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressuremonitor automatically detects new wheels ornew sensors. As long as a clear allocation ofthe tire pressure value to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active display message is showninstead of the tire pressure display. The tirepressures are already being monitored.

i If a spare wheel/emergency spare wheelis mounted, the system may continue toshow the tire pressure of the wheel that hasbeen removed for a few minutes. If thisoccurs, the value displayed for the positionwhere the spare wheel/emergency sparewheel is mounted is not the same as thespare wheel/emergency spare wheel'scurrent tire pressure.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressure monitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning messageis shown in the multifunction display and theyellow tire pressure monitor warning lampcomes on.RIf the Correct Tire Pressure message

appears in the multifunction display, thetire pressure in at least one tire is too low

Tire pressure 311

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

and must be corrected at the next oppor-tunity.RIf the Check Tires message appears in the

multifunction display, the tire pressure inone or more tires has dropped significantlyand the tires must be checked.RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction mes-

sage appears in the multifunction display,the tire pressure in one or more tires hasdropped suddenly and the tires must bechecked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes inthe display messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 229).

i If the wheel positions on the vehicle arerotated, the tire pressures may be dis-played for the wrong positions for a shorttime. This is rectified after a few minutes ofdriving, and the tire pressures are displayedfor the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as the refer-ence values for monitoring. In most cases, thetire pressure monitor will automaticallydetect the new reference values after youhave changed the tire pressure. However, youcan also define reference values manually asdescribed here. The tire pressure monitorthen monitors the new tire pressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the value recom-

mended for the corresponding driving sit-uation on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the driver's sideB-pillar (Y page 306).Additional tire pressure values for differentloads can also be found on the tire pressuretable on the inside of the fuel filler flap(Y page 306).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the = or ; button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Service menu.

X Press the 9 or : button to selectTire Pressure.

X Press the a button.The multifunction display shows the cur-rent tire pressure for the individual tires orthe Tire pressures will be dis‐played after driving a few minutesmessage.

X Press the : button.The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message appears inthe multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press the a button.

The Tire Press. Monitor Restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressuresare within the specified range. The new tirepressures are then accepted as referencevalues and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the % button.

The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Radio type approval for the tire pres-sure monitor

Country Radio type approval number

USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433AFCC ID: MRXGG4FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4

Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433AIC: 2546A-GG4IC: 2546A-MC34MA4

312 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows the maximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximum permis-sible vehicle load. It also contains detailsof the tire sizes and corresponding pres-sures for tires mounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu-pants, the fuel and the cargo. You canalso find information about the maximumgross axle weight rating on the front andrear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or the maxi-mum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible loadi The specifications shown on the Tire and

Loading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The maximum permis-sible load is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data shown here. The maxi-mum permissible load that applies for yourvehicle can be found on your vehicle's Tireand Loading Information placard.

X Specification for maximum permissibleload : is listed on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combined weightof occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,load, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

Loading the vehicle 313

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Number of seatsi The specifications shown on the Tire and

Loading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The number of seats isvehicle-specific and can differ from thedetails shown. The number of seats in yourvehicle can be found on the Tire and Load-ing Information placard.

Maximum number of seats : indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXX kilo-grams or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs and there will be five150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage load capa-city calculated in step 4.

X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle willbe towing a trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle. Refer tothis Operator's Manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle(Y page 316).

314 Loading the vehicleW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea load limit of 1 500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you areusing the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard (Y page 314).

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 2 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of the occupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occu-pants

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)Occupant 2:180 lbs (82 kg)Occupant 3:160 lbs (73 kg)Occupant 4:140 lbs (63 kg)Occupant 5:120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1:200 lbs (91 kg)Occupant 2:190 lbs (86 kg)Occupant 3:150 lbs (68 kg)

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)

Gross weight of all occupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

Loading the vehicle 315

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 3 Permissible load and trailer load/nose-weight (maximum permissible load rat-ing from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)

1500 lbs(680 kg) -750 lbs (340 kg)= 750 lbs(340 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg) –540 lbs (245 kg)= 960 lbs(435 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg) -150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs(612 kg)

The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Further information can be found under "Towing a trailer" (Y page 316).

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargocarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 313).Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, allpassengers, load and trailer load/noseweight(if applicable) must not exceed the permissi-ble gross vehicle weight.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): themaximum permissible weight that can be car-ried by one axle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (gross vehi-cle weight and maximum gross axle weightrating), have your loaded vehicle (includingdriver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load ifapplicable) weighed on a suitable vehicleweighbridge.

Trailer load/noseweightYour Mercedes-Benz has been designed pri-marily to carry passengers and their luggage.Mercedes-Benz does not recommend towinga trailer with your vehicle.

Maximum load rating

Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 313).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Maximum tire load : is the maximum per-missible weight for which the tire is approved.

316 Maximum load ratingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Overview of Tire Quality GradingStandards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Their pur-pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia-ble information on tire performance data. tiremanufacturers have to grade tires using threeperformance factors: tread wear :, tire trac-tion ; and heat resistance =. All tires soldin North America are provided with the cor-responding quality class mark on the sidewallof the tire, even though these regulations donot apply to Canada.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Where applicable, the tire grading informa-tion can be found on the tire sidewall betweenthe tread shoulder and maximum tire width.For example:

Treadwear Traction Temperature

200 AA A

All passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government course as atire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, how-ever, and may depart significantly from thenorm, due to variations in driving habits, ser-vice practices and differences in road char-acteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on a wet surface asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfa-ces.You should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around thefreezing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimumtread depth of ã in (4 mm) for all four wintertires (Y page 305) to maintain normal drivingcharacteristics in winter. Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.Stopping distance, however, is still consider-ably greater than when the road is not cov-

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 317

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

ered with ice or snow. Take appropriate carewhen driving.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C. These represent the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and its ability to dis-sipate heat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higherlevels of performance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required by law.

Tire labeling

OverviewThe following markings are on the tire in addi-tion to the tire name (sales designation) andthe manufacturer's name:

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 322)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 321)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 316)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 309)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 322)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa-

city and speed index (Y page 319)D Load index (Y page 321)E Tire name

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

318 Tire labelingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed rating

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

General: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter that precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: theseare light truck tires according to U.S. manu-facturing standards.If "T" precedes the size description: compactemergency wheels with high tire pressurethat are only designed for temporary use in anemergency.Tire width: tire width : shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is thesize ratio between the tire height and tirewidth and is shown in percent. The aspect

ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width bythe tire height.Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diam-eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of therim flange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing index Ais a numerical code that specifies the maxi-mum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 313).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires canbear. For further information on the maximumtire load in kilograms and lbs, see(Y page 316).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 321).Speed rating: speed rating B specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully and

Tire labeling 319

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

adapt your driving style to the traffic condi-tions.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up ofload-bearing index A and speed rating B.RIf the size description of your tire includes

"ZR" and there are no service specifica-tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order tofind out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam-ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. Theletter "Y" represents the speed rating. Themaximum speed of the tire is limited to186 mph (300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires with maxi-

mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR", and the service specifi-cation must be given in parentheses. Exam-

ple: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating"(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed ofthe tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Askthe tire manufacturer about the maximumspeed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S5 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S5 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S5 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S5 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with the M+S marking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to the M+S marking, winter tiresalso have the i snowflake symbol onthe tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfillthe requirements of the Rubber Manufac-turers Association (RMA) and the RubberAssociation of Canada (RAC) regardingsnow traction, and were specially devel-oped for driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding the following speeds:RAll vehicles (except AMG vehicles):

130 mph (210 km/h)RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h)RAMG vehicles with increased top speed:

174 mph (280 km/h)The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac-tory may be higher than the maximum speedthat the electronic speed limiter permits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating for your vehicle as specified inthe "Tires" section (Y page 329), e.g. if youbuy new tires.Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

5 Or M+S i for winter tires.

320 Tire labelingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Load index

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

In addition to the load-bearing index, loadindex : may be imprinted after the lettersthat identify speed rating B(Y page 319) onthe sidewall of the tire.RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the

example above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced

tireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range that

depends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations prescribe that everymanufacturer of new tires or retreader has toimprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tireproduced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables tire manufacturers to inform pur-chasers of recalls and other safety-relevantmatters. It makes it possible for the pur-chaser to easily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifi-cation code ;, tire size =, tire type code ?and manufacturing date A.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol : indicates that the tire complieswith the requirements of the U.S. Departmentof Transportation.Manufacturer identification code: manu-facturer identification code ; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 302).Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code ? can be usedby the manufacturer as a code to describespecific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.

Tire labeling 321

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Tire characteristics

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

This information describes the type of tirecord and the number of layers in sidewall :and under tire tread ;.

Definition of terms for tires and load-ing

Tire ply composition and materialused

Describes the number of plies or the numberof layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tiretread and sidewall. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals(kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe United States Department of Transporta-tion.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which the vehi-cle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

A uniform standard to grade the quality oftires with regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using U.S.government testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressureThe recommended tire pressure applies tothe tires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for variousoperating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment

This is the combined weight of all standardand optional equipment available for the vehi-cle, regardless of whether it is actually instal-led on the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

322 Definition of terms for tires and loadingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identifica-tion. It specifies the speed range for which thetire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica-ble. The gross vehicle weight must not exceedthe gross vehicle weight rating GVWR asspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories, occu-pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-weight, if applicable). The gross vehicleweight rating is specified on the vehicle iden-tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of the curbweight of the vehicle, the weight of the acces-sories, the total load limit and the weight ofthe optional equipment installed at the fac-tory.

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressureis bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equiva-lent of 1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa-city more precisely.

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standard equip-ment including the maximum capacity of fuel,oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-tioning system and optional equipment ifthese are installed in the vehicle, but does notinclude passengers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum load rating in kilograms orpounds is the maximum weight for which atire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing the maximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Definition of terms for tires and loading 323

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold.

Tire pressure of cold tiresThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked without

direct sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven further

than 1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These

optional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in thecurb weight and the weight of the accesso-ries.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains the maximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis-tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread islevel with the bars, the wear limit of á in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats inthe vehicle.

324 Definition of terms for tires and loadingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Changing a wheel

Flat tireYou can find information on what to do in theevent of a flat tire in the "Flat tire" section(Y page 286).Information on driving with MOExtended tiresin the event of a flat tire can be found under"MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat char-acteristics" (Y page 287).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are loca-ted in the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage the elec-tronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 325).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to the inter-vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty bookin your vehicle documents. If no warrantybook is available, the tires should be rotated

every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Donot change the direction of wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis rotated. Check the tire pressure and reac-tivate the tire pressure monitor if necessary.Information on changing tires and mountingthe spare wheel (Y page 325).

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. These advantages can onlybe gained if the tires are installed correspond-ing to the direction of rotation.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStore wheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and

level ground.X Apply the parking brake.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-

ahead position.X Move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove

the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the

driver's door.The on-board electronics have status 0,which is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

Mounting a wheel 325

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 136).

X If included in the vehicle equipment,remove the tire-change tool kit from thevehicle.

X In addition, safeguard the vehicle againstrolling away.

Securing the vehicle to prevent itfrom rolling away

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,it can be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 286).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsafety measure to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, for example when changing awheel.X Fold both plates upwards :.X Fold out lower plate ;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into

the openings in base plate =.

Securing the vehicle on level groundX On level ground: place chocks or other

suitable items under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradientsX On light downhill gradients: place

chocks or other suitable items in front ofthe wheels of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

326 Mounting a wheelW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Observe the following when raising the vehi-cle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-

specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-cle raised.RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold

the vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suited for per-forming maintenance work under the vehi-cle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and

downhill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from

rolling away by applying the parking brakeand inserting wheel chocks. Do not disen-gage the parking brake while the vehicle israised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and

non-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, flat, load-bearing underlay must beused. On a slippery surface, a non-slipunderlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.RDo not use wooden blocks or similar

objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.RMake sure that the distance between the

underside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).RNever place your hands and feet under the

raised vehicle.RDo not lie under the vehicle.RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is

raised.RNever open or close a door or the trunk lid

when the vehicle is raised.RMake sure that no persons are present in

the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jack-ing up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-pletely.

The jacking points are located just behind thefront wheel housings and just in front of therear wheel housings (arrows).

X Position jack = at jacking point ;.

Mounting a wheel 327

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

X Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = sitscompletely on jacking point ;. The base ofthe jack must lie evenly on the ground.

X Turn crank ? until the tire is raised a max-imum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.

Removing a wheel! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a

dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

X Unscrew the wheel bolts.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec-tion (Y page 325).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and therespective wheel.Be sure to use the original-length wheel boltswhen re-mounting the original wheel after ithas been repaired.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub andpush it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-ger-tight.

328 Mounting a wheelW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

X Turn the crank of the jack clockwise untilthe vehicle is once again standing firmly onthe ground.

X Place the jack to one side.X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-

wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:to A). The specified tightening torque is96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position andstore it together with the rest of the tire-change tool kit in the stowage well underthe trunk floor.

X Transport the faulty wheel in the trunk.orX Depending on the size of the wheel, you

may also be able to secure the defectivewheel in the spare wheel well. In this case,you will have to remove the stowage trayfrom the spare wheel well and stow itsecurely in the trunk.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 306).

i When you are driving with the emergencyspare wheel mounted, the tire pressuremonitor cannot function reliably. Onlyrestart the tire pressure monitor when thedefective wheel has been replaced with anew wheel. All wheels mounted must beequipped with functioning sensors.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-

ommends that you only use tires andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-cle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABSor ESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended

(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-

tain AMG tires)Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tiresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehiclenoise emissions or fuel consumption, mayotherwise be adversely affected. In addi-tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen-sion variations could cause the tires tocome into contact with the bodywork andaxle components. This could result in dam-age to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than those tes-ted and approved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop.

Wheel and tire combinations 329

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Overview of abbreviations used in the follow-ing tire tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axleThe recommended pressures for variousoperating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard

with the recommended tire pressures onthe B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of the

fuel filler flapObserve the notes on recommended tirepressures under various operating conditions(Y page 306).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-nance recommendations of the tire manufac-turer in the vehicle document wallet.Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/

right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time (sum-

mer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-ferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 287).

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that you addi-tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit ifyou mount tires that do not feature run-flatproperties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit maybe obtained from a qualified specialist work-shop.

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.

i The following pages contain informationon approved wheel rims and tire sizes forequipping your vehicle with winter tires.

Winter tires are not available at the factoryas standard equipment or optional extras.If you want to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, it may be necessaryto obtain wheel rims in the correspondingsize. The size of the approved winter tiresmay differ from the standard tires. This isdependent on the model and the equip-ment installed at the factory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

330 Wheel and tire combinationsW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Tires

C 250

Summer tiresR 16

Tires Wheels

BA: 205/55 R16 91 H BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)

BA: 205/55 R16 91 W BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)

R 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/45 R17 91 W6, 7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

FA: 225/45 R17 91 W7

RA: 245/40 R17 91 W7, 8

FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 2.28 in (58 mm)

R 18

Tires Wheels

FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XLRA: 255/35 R18 94 Y XL8, 9

FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XLRA: 255/35 R18 94 Y XL8, 9

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.97 in (50 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

6 Not in combination with sports suspension code 486 or dynamic handling package code 483.7 Available as MOExtended tires.8 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.9 Additional measures necessary (hub caps on rear axle, code 776).

Wheel and tire combinations 331

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

All-weather tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/45 R17 91 H M+SRA: 245/40 R17 91 H M+S8

FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 2.28 in (58 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+SRA: 255/35 R18 94 H XL M+S8, 9

FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

FA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+SRA: 255/35 R18 94 H XL M+S8, 9

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.97 in (50 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

Winter tiresR16

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 205/55 R16 91 H M+Si BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)

R17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

8 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.9 Additional measures necessary (hub caps on rear axle, code 776).

332 Wheel and tire combinationsW

heel

s an

d tir

es

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/40 R18 92 H M+Si BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

BA: 225/40 R18 92 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.97 in (50 mm)

C 250 Sport

Summer tiresR 18

Tires Wheels

FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XLRA: 255/35 R18 94 Y XL8, 9

FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XLRA: 255/35 R18 94 Y XL8, 9

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.97 in (50 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

All-weather tiresR18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+SRA: 255/35 R18 94 H XL M+S8, 9

FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

FA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+SRA: 255/35 R18 94 H XL M+S8, 9

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.97 in (50 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

8 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.9 Additional measures necessary (hub caps on rear axle, code 776).

Wheel and tire combinations 333

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Winter tiresR18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/40 R18 92 H M+Si BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

BA: 225/40 R18 92 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.97 in (50 mm)

C 350

Summer tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/45 R17 91 W6, 7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

FA: 225/45 R17 91 W7

RA: 245/40 R17 91 W7, 8

FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 2.28 in (58 mm)

R 18

Tires Wheels

FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XLRA: 255/35 R18 94 Y XL8, 9

FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XLRA: 255/35 R18 94 Y XL8, 9

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.97 in (50 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

6 Not in combination with sports suspension code 486 or dynamic handling package code 483.7 Available as MOExtended tires.8 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.9 Additional measures necessary (hub caps on rear axle, code 776).

334 Wheel and tire combinationsW

heel

s an

d tir

es

All-weather tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/45 R17 91 H M+SRA: 245/40 R17 91 H M+S8

FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 2.28 in (58 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+SRA: 255/35 R18 94 H XL M+S8, 9

FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

FA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+SRA: 255/35 R18 94 H XL M+S8, 9

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.97 in (50 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

Winter tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/40 R18 92 H M+Si BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

BA: 225/40 R18 92 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.97 in (50 mm)

8 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.9 Additional measures necessary (hub caps on rear axle, code 776).

Wheel and tire combinations 335

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

C 350 4MATIC

Summer tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/45 R17 91 W6, 7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

FA: 225/45 R17 91 W7

RA: 245/40 R17 91 W7, 8

FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 2.28 in (58 mm)

R 18

Tires Wheels

FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XLRA: 255/35 R18 94 Y XL8, 9

FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XLRA: 255/35 R18 94 Y XL8, 9

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.97 in (50 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

All-weather tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/45 R17 91 H M+SRA: 245/40 R17 91 H M+S8

FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 2.28 in (58 mm)

6 Not in combination with sports suspension code 486 or dynamic handling package code 483.7 Available as MOExtended tires.8 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.9 Additional measures necessary (hub caps on rear axle, code 776).

336 Wheel and tire combinationsW

heel

s an

d tir

es

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+SRA: 255/35 R18 94 H XL M+S8, 9

FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

FA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+SRA: 255/35 R18 94 H XL M+S8, 9

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.97 in (50 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

Winter tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/40 R18 92 H M+Si BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

BA: 225/40 R18 92 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.97 in (50 mm)

C 63 AMG

Summer tiresR 18

Tires Wheels

FA: 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XLRA: 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL8

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

8 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.9 Additional measures necessary (hub caps on rear axle, code 776).

Wheel and tire combinations 337

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

R 19

Tires Wheels

FA: 235/35 ZR19 XLRA: 255/30 ZR19 XL8

FA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)RA: 9.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

FA: 235/35 ZR19 91 Y XLRA: 255/30 ZR19 91 Y XL8

FA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)RA: 9.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

Winter tiresR18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/40 R18 92 V XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)

BA: 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+S i8 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)

FA: 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+SiRA: 255/35 R18 94 V XL M+Si8

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

Emergency spare wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe wheel or tire size as well as the tire type ofthe spare wheel or emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.Mounting an emergency spare wheel mayseverely impair the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.

To avoid hazardous situations:Radapt your driving style accordingly and

drive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or

emergency spare wheel that differs in size.Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare

wheel of a different size briefly.Rdo not switch ESP® off.Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare

wheel of a different size replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop.Observe that the wheel and tire dimensionsas well as the tire type must be correct.

8 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

338 Emergency spare wheelW

heel

s an

d tir

es

When using an emergency spare wheel orspare wheel of a different size, you must notexceed the maximum speed of 50 mph(80 km/h).Snow chains must not be mounted on emer-gency spare wheels.

General notesYou should regularly check the pressure ofthe emergency spare wheel, particularly priorto long trips, and correct the pressure as nec-essary (Y page 306). The applicable value canbe found on the wheel or under "Technicaldata" (Y page 329).

i When you are driving with the emergencyspare wheel mounted, the tire pressuremonitor cannot function reliably. Onlyrestart the tire pressure monitor when thedefective wheel has been replaced with anew wheel.If an emergency spare wheel is mounted,the system may continue to show the tirepressure of the wheel that has beenremoved for a few minutes. The value dis-played for the mounted emergency sparewheel is not the same as the current tirepressure of the emergency spare wheel.

An emergency spare wheel may also bemounted against the direction of rotation.Observe the time restriction on use as well asthe speed limitation specified on the emer-gency spare wheel.Replace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to theemergency spare wheel.

"Minispare" emergency spare wheelThe "Minispare" emergency spare wheel canbe found in the stowage well under the trunkfloor.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 252).

X Remove tool kit tray :.X Turn stowage tray ; counter-clockwise

and remove it.X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare

wheel =.Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 325).

Emergency spare wheel 339

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Technical data

All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel

Tires Alloy wheels

T 125/90 R16 98 MTire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

3.5 B x 16 H2Wheel offset: 0.79 in (20 mm)

T 125/80 R17 99 M10

Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)3.5 B x 17 H2Wheel offset: 0.79 in (20 mm)

AMG vehicles

Collapsible spare wheel

Tires Alloy wheels

T 125/70 R18 99 MTire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

3.5 B x 18 H2Wheel offset: 0.79 in (20 mm)

10 Only for C 350 and C 350 4MATIC.

340 Emergency spare wheelW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Useful information ............................ 342Information regarding technicaldata .................................................... 342Identification plates ......................... 342Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 343Vehicle data ....................................... 349

341

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthe data for all vehicle variants and trimlevels.

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate :.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the identification plateis example data. This data is different forevery vehicle and can deviate from the datashown here. You can find the data applica-ble to your vehicle on the vehicle identifi-cation plate.

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

342 Identification platesTe

chni

cal d

ata

X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear-most position.

X Fold floor covering : upwards.You will see VIN ;.

The VIN can also be found in the followinglocations:Ron the lower edge of the windshield

(Y page 343)Ron the vehicle identification plate

(Y page 342)

Engine number

: Emission control information plate,including the certification of both federaland Californian emissions standards

; Engine number (stamped into the crank-case)

= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

Service products and filling capaci-ties

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComply with all valid regulations with respectto handling, storing, and disposing of servicefluids.Components and service products must bematched. You should therefore only use prod-ucts that have been tested and approved byMercedes-Benz.Information about tested and approved prod-ucts can be obtained from an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-tion on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engine

Service products and filling capacities 343

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediately

using soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,

immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-

tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capa-city

All models 17.4 US gal(66.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

C 63 AMG Approx.3.7 US gal

(14.0 l)

All other models Approx.2.1 US gal

(8.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premiumgrade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead toengine failure.

! Do not use the following:RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi-tives. Otherwise, engine damage mayoccur. This does not include cleaning addi-tives for the removal and prevention of res-idue build-up. Gasoline may only be mixedwith cleaning additives recommended byMercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You canobtain further information from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.

344 Service products and filling capacitiesTe

chni

cal d

ata

If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila-ble and you have to refuel with unleadedgasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol-lowing precautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg-

ular unleaded gasoline and fill the restwith premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine

speeds over 3,000 rpm.You will usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff for assis-tance.

i For further information, consult a quali-fied specialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You canrefuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

As a temporary measure, if the recommendedfuel is not available, you may also use regularunleaded gasoline with an octane rating of87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-formance and increase fuel consumption.Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden accel-eration. Never refuel using fuel with a lowerAKI.Information on refueling (Y page 150).

AMG vehicles

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additives

added later can lead to engine failure. Donot mix fuel additives with fuel. This doesnot include additives for the removal andprevention of residue buildup. gasolinemust only be mixed with additives recom-mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply withthe instructions for use on the productlabel. More information about recommen-ded additives can be obtained from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usebranded fuels that have additives.The quality of the fuel available in some coun-tries may not be sufficient. Residue couldbuild up in the injection system as a result. Insuch cases, and in consultation with anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gaso-line may be mixed with the cleaning additiverecommended by Mercedes-Benz. You mustobserve the notes and mixing ratios specifiedon the container.

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of aspecification other than is necessary to ful-fill the prescribed service intervals. Do notchange the engine oil or oil filter in order toachieve longer replacement intervals thanthose prescribed. You could otherwisecause engine damage or damage to theexhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the service inter-val display regarding the oil change. Other-wise, you may damage the engine and theexhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 343).The engine oils are matched to the perform-ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and serviceintervals. You should therefore only useengine oils and oil filters that are approved forvehicles with maintenance systems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter. Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Model MB Approval

All models 229.5

Service products and filling capacities 345

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oilsfor AMG vehicles.

i MB approval is indicated on the oil con-tainers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity

C 250C 250 Sport

5.8 US qt (5.5 l)

C 350C 350 4MATIC

6.9 US qt (6.5 l)

C 63 AMG 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

Additives

! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE classification(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outsidetemperatures. The table shows you whichSAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oilscan deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a resultof aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore

strongly recommended that you carry out reg-ular oil changes using an approved engine oilwith the appropriate SAE classification.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

When handling brake fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 343).The brake fluid change intervals can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialist work-shop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced ata qualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in the MaintenanceBooklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the

346 Service products and filling capacitiesTe

chni

cal d

ata

antifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g.on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in the MaintenanceBooklet.

Comply with the important safety precautionsfor service products when handling coolant(Y page 343).The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs thefollowing tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the cool-ant during operation is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-tion in the engine cooling system should:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine

cooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection

down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord-ance with MB Specifications for Service Prod-ucts 310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-led with a coolant mixture that ensuresadequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-tion.

i The coolant is checked with every main-tenance interval at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

C 250C 250 Sport

Approx. 8.1 US qt(7.7 l)

C 350 C 350 4MATIC

Approx. 10.1 US gal(9.6 l)

C 63 AMG Approx. 12.4 US qt(11.7 l)

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluidcould damage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

Service products and filling capacities 347

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

When handling washer fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 343).At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture

of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.

X Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 partswater.

At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture

of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-Fit.For the correct mixing ratio refer to theinformation on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle isfilled with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAGoil approved by Mercedes-Benz may beused. The approved PAG oil may not bemixed with any other PAG oil that is notapproved for R-134a refrigerant. Other-wise, the climate control system may bedamaged.

Service work, such as topping up refrigerantor replacing components, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. Allapplicable regulations must be adhered to,SAE standard J639 included.

Always have work on the climate control sys-tem carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerantWarning symbol : advises you about:Rpossible dangersRhaving service work carried out at a quali-

fied specialist workshop

Filling capacities

All models Capacity

Refrigerant 20.8 ± 0.4 oz(590 ± 10 g)

PAG oil 4.2 oz(120 g)

348 Service products and filling capacitiesTe

chni

cal d

ata

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a result

of:- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximum

payload.

Dimensions and weights

Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model : Opening height

C 250C 250 SportC 350C 350 4MATIC

C 63 AMG

Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

All models (exceptfor AMG vehicles)

Vehicle length 182.4 in (4633 mm)

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

78.6 in (1997 mm)

Vehicle height

Wheelbase 108.7 in (2760 mm)

Turning radius 36.1 ft (11.01 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)

Maximum trunk load

220 lb (100 kg)

C 63 AMG

Vehicle length 185.3 in (4707 mm)

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

78.6 in (1997 mm)

Vehicle height 54.8 in (1391 mm)

Wheelbase 108.9 in (2765 mm)

Turning radius 36.4 ft (11.10 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)

Maximum trunk load

220 lb (100 kg)

Vehicle data 349

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

350

351

352